Instrument Mechanic Vol II of II TP

INSTRUMENT MECHANIC
NSQF LEVEL - 5
1 Year
1st Year (Volume II of II)
TRADE PRACTICAL
SECTOR: ELECTRONICS & HARDWARE
DIRECTORATE GENERAL OF TRAINING

MINISTRY OF SKILL DEVELOPMENT & ENTREPRENEURSHIP
GOVERNMENT OF INDIA
NATIONAL INSTRUCTIONAL
MEDIA INSTITUTE, CHENNAI
Post Box No. 3142, CTI Campus, Guindy, Chennai - 600 032
(i)
Sector : Electronics and hardware
Duration : 2 Year
Trade : Instrument Mechanic - 1st Year (Volume II of II) - Trade Practical -
NSQF level - 5
Developed & Published by
National Instructional Media Institute

Post Box No.3142
Guindy, Chennai - 32
INDIA
Email: Chennai-nimi@nic.in
Website: www.nimi.gov.in
Copyright © 2021 National Instructional Media Institute, Chennai

First Edition : January 2022 Copies : 2020 Copies : 1000
Rs. /-
(ii)
FOREWORD
The Government of India has set an ambitious target of imparting skills to 30 crores people, one out of every
four Indians, by 2020 to help them secure jobs as part of the National Skills Development Policy. Industrial
Training Institutes (ITIs) play a vital role in this process especially in terms of providing skilled manpower.
Keeping this in mind, and for providing the current industry relevant skill training to Trainees, ITI syllabus
has been recently updated with the help of Mentor Councils comprising various stakeholder's viz. Industries,
Entrepreneurs, Academicians and representatives from ITIs.
The National Instructional Media Institute (NIMI), Chennai has now come up with instructional material to
suit the revised curriculum for Instrument Mechanic - 1st Year (Volume II of II) - Trade Practical-
NSQF Level - 5 in Electronics and hardware Sector under Yearly Pattern. The NSQF Level - 5 Trade
Practical will help the trainees to get an international equivalency standard where their skill proficiency
and competency will be duly recognized across the globe and this will also increase the scope of
recognition of prior learning. NSQF Level - 5 trainees will also get the opportunities to promote life long
learning and skill development. I have no doubt that with NSQF Level - 5 the trainers and trainees of ITIs,
and all stakeholders will derive maximum benefits from these IMPs and that NIMI's effort will go a long way
in improving the quality of Vocational training in the country.
The Executive Director & Staff of NIMI and members of Media Development Committee deserve appreciation
for their contribution in bringing out this publication.
Jai Hind
Director General/ Addl. Secretary

Ministry of Skill Development & Entrepreneurship,
Government of India.
New Delhi - 110 001
(iii)
PREFACE
The National Instructional Media Institute (NIMI) was established in 1986 at Chennai by then Directorate
General of Employment and Training (D.G.E & T), Ministry of Labour and Employment, (now under Directorate
General of Training, Ministry of Skill Development and Entrepreneurship) Government of India, with technical
assistance from the Govt. of the Federal Republic of Germany. The prime objective of this institute is to
develop and provide instructional materials for various trades as per the prescribed syllabus under the
Craftsman and Apprenticeship Training Schemes.
The instructional materials are created keeping in mind, the main objective of Vocational Training under
NCVT/NAC in India, which is to help an individual to master skills to do a job. The instructional materials are
generated in the form of Instructional Media Packages (IMPs). An IMP consists of Theory book, Practical
book, Test and Assignment book, Instructor Guide, Audio Visual Aid (Wall charts and Transparencies) and
other support materials.
The trade practical book consists of series of exercises to be completed by the trainees in the workshop.
These exercises are designed to ensure that all the skills in the prescribed syllabus are covered. The trade
theory book provides related theoretical knowledge required to enable the trainee to do a job. The test and
assignments will enable the instructor to give assignments for the evaluation of the performance of a trainee.
The wall charts and transparencies are unique, as they not only help the instructor to effectively present a
topic but also help him to assess the trainee's understanding. The instructor guide enables the instructor to
plan his schedule of instruction, plan the raw material requirements, day to day lessons and demonstrations.
IMPs also deals with the complex skills required to be developed for effective team work. Necessary care
has also been taken to include important skill areas of allied trades as prescribed in the syllabus.
The availability of a complete Instructional Media Package in an institute helps both the trainer and
management to impart effective training.
The IMPs are the outcome of collective efforts of the staff members of NIMI and the members of the Media
Development Committees specially drawn from Public and Private sector industries, various training institutes
under the Directorate General of Training (DGT), Government and Private ITIs.
NIMI would like to take this opportunity to convey sincere thanks to the Directors of Employment & Training
of various State Governments, Training Departments of Industries both in the Public and Private sectors,
Officers of DGT and DGT field institutes, proof readers, individual media developers and coordinators, but for
whose active support NIMI would not have been able to bring out this materials.
R. P. DHINGRA
Chennai - 600 032 EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR
(iv)
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
National Instructional Media Institute (NIMI) sincerely acknowledges with thanks for the co-operation and
contribution extended by the following Media Developers and their sponsoring organisations to bring out this
Instructional Material (Trade Practical) for the trade of Instrument Mechanic under Electronics & Hardware
Sector for ITIs.
MEDIA DEVELOPMENT COMMITTEE MEMBERS
Smt. Chitra _ Training officer,

DET, Tamil Nadu
Smt. Gomathi _ Training officer,

DET, Tamil Nadu
Shri. Thirugnanam _ Training officer (Retd),

DET, Tamil Nadu
NIMI - COORDINATORS
Shri.Nirmalya nath - Deputy General Manager,

NIMI- Chennai - 32.
Shri. S. Gopala krishnan - Assistant Manager,

NIMI - Chennai -32.
NIMI records its appreciation for the Data Entry, CAD, DTP operators for their excellent and devoted services in
the process of development of this Instructional Material.
NIMI also acknowledges with thanks the invaluable efforts rendered by all other NIMI staff who have contributed
towards the development of this Instructional Material.
NIMI is also grateful to everyone who has directly or indirectly helped in developing this Instructional Material.
(v)
INTRODUCTION
TRADE PRACTICAL
The trade practical manual is intended to be used in practical workshop. It consists of a series of practical
exercises to be completed by the trainees during the course. These exercises are designed to ensure that all
the skills in compliance with NSQF LEVEL - 5 syllabus are covered.
The manual is divided into Sixteen modules.
The skill training in the shop floor is planned through a series of practical exercises centered around some
practical project. However, there are few instances where the individual exercise does not form a part of project.
While developing the practical manual, a sincere effort was made to prepare each exercise which will be easy to
understand and carry out even by below average trainee. However the development team accept that there is a
scope for further improvement. NIMI looks forward to the suggestions from the experienced training faculty for
improving the manual.
Module 1 Semi conductor, Transistors and power supply circuit 150

Module 2 Oscillators 25
Module 3 Operational amplifier 50
Module 4 Logic circuits 100
Module 5 A/D and D/A converters 25
Module 6 Digital meters & CRO 50
Module 7 Computers 75
Module 8 Microprocessor 8085 50
525
The trade theory has to be taught and learnt along with the corresponding exercise contained in the manual on
trade practical. The indications about the corresponding practical exercises are given in every sheet of this
manual.
It will be preferable to teach/learn trade theory connected to each exercise at least one class before performing
the related skills in the shop floor. The trade theory is to be treated as an integrated part of each exercise.
The material is not for the purpose of self-learning and should be considered as supplementary to class room
instruction.
TRADE THEORY
The manual of trade theory consists of theoretical information for the Course of the Instrument Mechanic Trade
Practical NSQF Level - 5 in Electronics & Hardware. The contents are sequenced according to the practical
exercise contained in NSQF LEVEL - 5 syllabus on Trade Theory attempt has been made to relate the theoretical
aspects with the skill covered in each exercise to the extent possible. This correlation is maintained to help the
trainees to develop the perceptional capabilities for performing the skills.
(vi)
CONTENTS
Lesson No. Title of the Lesson Learning Page No.
Outcome
Module 1 : Semi conductor, Transistors and power supply

circuit
2.1.145 Identity different types of diodes, their specifications 1
2.1.146 Test power diode, zener diode and tunnel diode, photo diode 2
2.1.147 Determine V-I characteristics of semiconductor diode 3
2.1.148 Measure the voltage and current through a diode 4
2.1.149 Measure the voltage and current through a zener diode 5
2.1.150 Identify and check different type of transistors and specification 7
2.1.151 Construct fixed bias, emitter bias, and voltage divider bias transistor
amplifier 10
2.1.152 Construct and test a CE amplifier with and without emitter bypass
capacitors 13
2.1.153 Construct and test a Common Base amplifier 16
2.1.154 Construct a single stage amplifier and measure current gain,
voltage gain 18
2.1.155 Identify different power electronic components, specification and
terminals 20
2.1.156 Construct and test a FET Amplifier 22
2.1.157 Identify various power MOSFETs by its number and test 24
2.1.158 Identify different heatsinks test circuit with a small load 1 26
2.1.159 Identify different types of transformers and test 29
2.1.160 Identify the primary and secondary windings of transformer and
test the polarity 30
2.1.161 Construct and test a Half-wave, Full wave and Bridge rectifier circuit 31
2.1.162 Construct and measure the test different filter circuit used in rectifier 34
2.1.163 Measure ripple voltage, ripple frequency and ripple factor of
rectifier for different load and filter capacitors 36
2.1.164 Construct and test voltage doubler and tripler 37
2.1.165 Construct and test zener diode based voltage regulator circuit 39
2.1.166-167 Construct and test zener based shunt regulator & zener based
series regulator 40
2.1.168 Construct and test a +12V fixed voltage regulator using 3
terminal regulator IC 43
2.1.169 Construct and test fixed +15V and -15V Voltage regulator unit ICs 45
2.1.170 Construct and test a 1.2V to 30V variable output regulated power
supply using IC LM317T and its characteristics 48
2.1.179 Identify the components/devices of SMPS and draw their

corresponding symbols 50
2.1.180 List the defect and symptom in the faulty SMPS 52
2.1.181 Measure/ Monitor at major test points of computer SMPS unit 2 56
2.1.182 Troubleshoot the fault in SMPS unit, rectify defect and verify output
with load 60
2.1.183 Identify front panel controls & indicators of UPS 66
(vii)
CONTENTS
Outcome
2.1.184 Identify UPS transformer and various circuit board 68
2.1.185 Perform load test to measure backup time 2 70
2.1.186 Install and test an inverter 72
2.1.187 Troubleshoot the fault in inverter unit, rectify defects and verify the
output with load 74
2.1.188 Construct and test thyristor based devies 76
2.1.189 Measure and plot input and output characteristics of a transistor
CE amplifier 79
2.1.190 Check for cold continuity of PCB 82
2.1.191 Solder the SMD components in the given PCB 83
2.1.192 Opening, entering & editing of data in a table - part - II 3 84
2.1.193 Identification of different cables and connectors used in networking 86
2.1.194 Repair solder mask and damaged pad 87
2.1.195 Construct and test a CE amplifier and measure the AC & DC load
line 90
Module 2 : Oscillators
2.2.196 Demonstrate Colpitt’s oscillator, Hartley oscillator circuits and
compare the output frequency of the oscillator by CRO 93
2.2.197 Construct and test RC phase-shift oscillator circuits 95
2.2.198 Construct and test a crystal oscillator circuit 96
2.2.199-200 Construct and test a clapp oscillator circuit and IC based
oscillator circuit 97
Module 3 : Operational amplifier
2.3.201 Use analog IC tester to test various analog ICs 98
2.3.202 Construct and test various Op-Amp circuits Inverting, Non-inverting,
and Summing Amplifiers 4 100
2.3.203 Construct and test differentiator and integrator circuits 103
2.3.204 Construct and test a voltage to current and current to voltage
convert using Op-Amp 105
2.3.205 Construct and test instrumentation amplifier 106
2.3.206 Identify the pin configuration and check the output voltage of 555
IC 107
2.3.207 Construct and test astable timer circuit using IC 555 108
2.3.208 Construct and test monostable timber circuit using IC 555 109
2.3.209 Construct and test VCO (V to F converter) using IC 555 111
2.3.210 Construct and test 555 timers as pulse width modulator 113
2.3.211 Construct and test automatic delay on circuit using 555IC and
other discrete component 114
Module 4 : Logic circuits
2.4.212 Identify different logic gates 115
2.4.213 Verify the truth tables of all logic gate ICs by connecting switches
and LEDs 5 116
2.4.214 Construct and verify the truth table of all the gates using NAND and
NOR gates 119
(viii)
CONTENTS
Outcome
2.4.215 Use digital IC tester to test various digital ICs (TTL and CMOS) 125
2.4.216 Construct and verify the truth table of all the gates using DTL circuit 127
2.4.217 Construct half adder circuit using ICs and verify the truth table 130
2.4.218 Construct Full adder with two Half adder circuit using ICs and verify
the truth table 131
2.4.219 Construct and test a Half subtractor & Full subtractor circuits 132
2.4.220 Construct the adder cum subtractor circuit and verify the result 134
2.4.221 Identify different Flip-Flop ICs by the number printed on them 136
2.4.222 Construct and test R-S Flip-flop using IC 7400 with clock and
without clock pulse 137
2.4.223 Verify the truth tables of Flipflop ICs (RS, D, T, JK, MSJK) by
connecting switches and LEDs 139
2.4.224 Construct and test 7493 as a modulus-12 counter 140
2.4.225 Construct and test a four bit synchronous binary counter using
IC 74163 141
2.4.226 Construct and test synchronous Decade counter 143
2.4.227 Construct and test an UP/DOWN synchronous decade counter
using 74190 and monitor the output on LEDs 144
2.4.228 Construct and test a multiplexer and Demultiplexer circuit using ICS 146
2.4.229 Identify and test common anode and common cathode 5 148
2.4.230 Construct and test octal to binary encoder and decoder circuit
using IC 74148 and IC 74132 149
2.4.231 Construct and test decimal to BCD encoder using IC 74147 and
seven segment LED display 151
2.4.232 Construct and test seven segment LED Display decoder with
IC 7447 153
2.4.233 Measure current flowing through a resistor and display it on LED
module 155
2.4.234 Identify different parts, functions of different types of displays 156
Module 5 : A/D and D/A converters

2.5.235 Identify different A/D and D/A IC’s, its function and specification 159
2.5.236-237 Construct and test a Binary weighted and R-2R Ladder type Digital
- to- Analog converters 160
2.5.238 Construct and test Digital RAMP analog to digital converter (ADC)
circuit) 162
2.5.239 Performing the interfacing of IEEE 488.2 standard with a single
controller 163
2.5.240-242 Identify different pins signal of RS 232 perform interfacing of
RS 232 to PC and convert RS 485 signals to RS 232 signals using
RS 485 to RS 232 convertor 165
Module 6 : Digital meters & CRO

2.6.243 Identify different parts, of digital meters and CRO 167
2.6.244 Identify LED display module and its decoder/driver ICs 169
2.6.245 Display a word on a two line LED 171
(ix)
CONTENTS
Outcome
2.6.246 Measure current flowing through sensor and display it on LED
Module 173
2.6.247 Practice on measuring instruments in single and three phase circuits 5 174
2.6.248 Identify the different capacitors and measure capacitance of
various capacitors using LCR meters 177
2.6.249 Practice on time measuring instrument to measure the time in
different electrical control circuits 178
2.6.250 Identify the different controls on the CRO front panel and observe
the function of each control 179
2.6.251 Measure VDC, VAC, time period using CRO sine wave Parameters 181
2.6.252 Take a print of a signal from DSO by connecting a printer and 6
tally with applied signal 183
2.6.253 Identify different types of CRO probes used to measure the signals 185
Module 7 : Computers
2.7.254 Identify different parts of PC, CPU and familiar with different CPU
operation 186
2.7.255 Practice on windows interface and navigating windows 190
2.7.256 Customize desktop settings and user accounts 195
2.7.257 View system properties and control panel 201
2.7.258 Installing system application software 205
2.7.259 & 265 Familiar with multimedia system of CD ROM, DVD ROM & sound
CARDS, install and replace RAM in mother board 7 213
2.7.260 Burning a data in CD or DVD's using Nero 217
2.7.261 Identify different parts, its function and operation of CPU 218
2.7.262 Familiar with different CPU operations 222
2.7.263 Identify various computer peripherals and connect it to the system 223
2.7.264 Dismantle and assemble the desktop computer system 225
2.7.266 Install driver for printer and print document using different
documents 228
2.7.267-268 Identification, Installation of different types of modems 231
2.7.269 Construct and test DAC and ADC using computer network circuit 233
Module 8 : Microprocessor 8085
2.8.270 Identify various ICs and their function on the given microprocessor
kit 234
2.8.271 Identify the address range of RAM & ROM of 8085 microprocessor 235
2.8.272 Measure the crystal frequency, connect it to the controller 236
2.8.273 Identify the port pins of the microprocessor and configure the ports 8
for input & output operation 237
2.8.274 Use 8085 microprocessor, connect 8 LEDs to the port and blink the
LEDs with switch 238
2.8.275 Familiar with instruction set of 8085 micro processor data transfer
group, Arithmetic group and logic group 239
2.8.276 Perform addition and subtraction of two 8 bit numbers using 8085
microprocessor 241
(x)
CONTENTS
Outcome
2.8.277 Demonstrate entering of simple program, execute and monitor the

result 244
2.8.278 Write a programme in assembly language load accumulator with
8 bit data and transfer the data accumulator to B register 245
2.8.279 Write a programme in assembly language data to load two 8 bit 8
data into two memory location add them result be store in another
memory location 246
2.8.280 Identify the port pins of the processor and 8255 configure the
ports for input and output operations 248
LEARNING / ASSESSABLE OUTCOME
On completion of this book you shall be able to

S.No Learning Outcome Lesson No
1 Identify, Test various analog and power electronics components, Construct,

test and analyze the circuit functioning. 2.1.145 - 2.1.170
2 Detect the faults and troubleshoot SMPS, UPS, inverter, converter and
Thyristor family. 2.1.179 - 2.1.188
3 Identify, place, solder and de-solder and test different SMD, discrete
components with due care and following safety norms using proper tools/setup. 2.1.189 - 2.1.195
4 Construct and test different circuits using operational amplifiers circuits and
execute the result. 2.2.196 - 2.3.211
5 Identify, test and verify all digital ICs. Assemble, test and troubleshoot various
digital circuits and digital instruments. 2.4.212 - 2.6.249
6 Measure the various parameters by CRO and execute the result with standard
one. 2.6.250 - 2.6.253
7 Install and setup operating system and related software in a computer &
Practice with MS office and application software related to instruments. 2.7.254 - 2.7.269
8 Identify various functional blocks of a microprocessor system, identify various
I/O Ports, write and executive simple program and Interface a model application
with the microprocessor kit and run the application. 2.8.270 - 2.8.280
(xi)
SYLLABUS
Duration Reference Learning Professional Skills Professional Knowledge

Outcome (Trade Practical) (Trade Theory)
with Indicative hours
Professional Identify, Test various 145.Identify different types of Semiconductor, Covalent bond,
Skill 100 Hrs. analog and power diodes, diode modules and Doping, Intrinsic and extrinsic
electronics components, their specifications. (03hrs.) semiconductor. PN junction diode,
Professional
146.Test the power diode, Zener Forward and Reverse
Knowledge Construct, test and
diode, tunnel diode, photo characteristics. Specification of
28 Hrs. analyze the circuit
diode using multi meter and diodes (data sheets). Applications
functioning.
determine forward to reverse of diode. Special semiconductor
resistance ratio. (04hrs.) diode-Zener diode, tunnel diode,
Photo diode.
147.Determine V-I characteristics
of semiconductor diode. Transistors. Defining transistors,
(04hrs.) NPN& PNP transistor, Symbol,
operation, Biasing of Transistor &
148.Measure the voltage and
mode of Application. Transistor CB,
current through a diode in a
CC, CE Amplification, current gain,
circuit and verify its forward
voltage gain, and power gain.
characteristic. (04hrs.)
Introduction to FET, MOSFET.
149.Measure the voltage and
Rectifiers: half wave rectifier, full
current through a Zener diode
wave (bridge & center tapped)
in a circuit and verify its
rectifier. Voltage multipliers. Filters:
forward and reverse
Introduction, purpose and use of
characteristic. (02hrs.)
ripple filter. Types of filters.
150.Identify and check different Capacitance filter, inductance
type of transistors their filters, RC filters, LC filters, voltage
package and specification. dividers and bypass filters.
(02 hrs.)
Voltage regulators.
151.Construct and test fixedbias,
Introduction & purpose Zener
emitter-bias and voltage
regulators, shunt regulators, series
divider-bias transistor amplifier.
regulators, IC regulators, variable
(03 hrs.)
regulators. (28 hrs.)
152. Construct and Test a common
emitter amplifier with and
without bypass capacitors
(03 hrs.)
153.Construct and Test common
base amplifier. (03 hrs.)
154.Construct a single stage
amplifier and measure current
gain, voltage gain & power
gain. (02 hrs.)
155.Identify different power
electronic components, their
specification and terminals.
(03 hrs.)
156.Construct and test a FET
Amplifier. (03 hrs.)
157.Identify variousPower
MOSFET by its number and
test by using multimeter.
(02 hrs.)
(xii)
158.Identify different heat sinks used
with power MOSFET test circuit
with a small load. (01 hr.)
159.Identify different types of
transformers and test. (03 hrs.)
160.Identify the primary and
secondary transformer windings
and test the polarity (02 hrs.)
161.Construct and test a half wave,
full wave and Bridge rectifier
circuit. (05hrs.)
162.Construct and test different filter
circuit used in rectifier and
measure output voltage with load.
(04hrs.)
163.Measure ripple voltage, ripple
frequency and ripple factor of
rectifiers for different load and
filter capacitors. (04hrs.)
164.Construct and test voltage doubler
and Tripler. (03 hrs.)
165.Construct and test Zener based
voltage regulator circuit. (8hrs.)
166.Construct and test Zener based
shunt regulator. (9hrs.)
167.Construct and test Zener and
transistor-based series regulator.
(09hrs.)
168.Construct and test a +12V fixed
voltage regulator. (04hrs.)
169.Construct and test a fixed +15ve
and –15ve voltage regulator using
ICs. (04hrs.)
170.Construct and test a 1.2V – 30V
variable output regulated power
supply using IC LM317T and its
characteristics. (05 hrs.)
Professional Detect the faults and 179.Identify the components/devices Power Supply units.
Skill 25 Hrs. troubleshoot SMPS, UPS, and draw their corresponding Introduction, purpose & use. UPS
inverter, converterand symbols. (02 hrs.) and SMPS, inverters and
Professional
Thyristor family.
Knowledge 180.List the defect and symptom in converters and their applications.
07 Hrs. the faulty SMPS. (02 hrs.) Thyristor devices: basic
description and applications of
181.Measure / Monitor major test
SCR, TRIAC, DIAC. (07 hrs.)
points of computer SMPS.
(03 hrs.)
182.Troubleshoot the fault in the given
SMPS unit. Rectify the defect and
verify the output with load. Record
your procedure followed for
trouble shooting the defects.
(04 hrs.)
183.Identify front panel control &
indicators of UPS. (02 hrs.)
(xiii)
184.Open top cover of a UPS;
identify its isolator transformers,
the UPS transformer and various
circuit boards in UPS. (03 hrs.)
185.Perform load test to measure
backup time. (02 hrs.)
186.Install and test an inverter.
(03 hrs.)
187.Troubleshoot the fault in the
given inverter unit. Rectify the
defects and verify the output with
load. (02 hrs.)
188.Construct and test
thyristorbased devices and
check SCR, DIAC, TRIAC and
other discrete components.
(02 hrs.)
Professional Identify, place, solder 189.Measure and plot input and General characteristics of an am-
Skill 25 Hrs. and desolder and test output characteristics of a CE plifier, Concept of amplification.
Professional different SMD, discrete amplifier. (05 hrs.) Types of Amplifiers. Effect of
Knowledge components with due 190.Check for cold continuity of PCB. temperature. DC load line and AC
07 Hrs. care and following (03 hrs.) load line. PCB basic construction,
safety norms using applications. Lay outing circuit on
191.Solder the SMD components from
proper tools/setup. PCB. (07 hrs.)
the given PCB. (04 hrs.)
192.De-solder the SMD components
in the same PCB. (04 hrs.)
193.Identify loose /dry solder, broken
tracks on printed wired
assemblies. (04 hrs.)
194.Repair solder mask and damage
pad. (03 hrs.)
195.Construct and test a CE amplifier
and measure the AC & DC load
line. (02 hrs.)
Professional Identify, Test various Oscillators Oscillator’s oscillations, oscillation
Skill 25 Hrs. analog and power 196.Demonstrate Colpitts oscillator, frequency, basic working principle
Professional electronics components, Hartley oscillator circuits and and working of Talk circuit, Crystal
Knowledge Construct, test and compare the output frequency of controlled oscillators, Phase shift
07 Hrs. analyze the circuit the oscillator by CRO. (07 hrs.) oscillators, RC phase shift
functioning. 197.Construct and test a RC phase oscillators, Colpitt, Clapp, Hartley,
shift oscillator circuits. (05 hrs.) and IC oscillators. (07 hrs.)
198.Construct and test a
crystalcontrolled oscillator
circuit. (05 hrs.)
199.Construct and test a clapp
oscillator circuits. (04 hrs.)
200.Construct and test different type
of ICs based Oscillator circuit.
(04 hrs.)
Professional Construct and test 201.Use analog IC tester to test the
Skill 50Hrs.; different circuits using various analog ICs. (03 hrs.)
Professional operational amplifiers 202.Construct and test various Op-
Knowledge circuits and execute the Amp circuits Inverting, Non-
14Hrs. result. inverting and Summing
Amplifiers. (08 hrs.)
(xiv)
203.Construct and test Differentiator Operational Amplifier.
and Integrator circuits. (05 hrs.) Differential amplifier, ideal op-amp.
204.Construct and test a voltage to Op-amp with feedback, advantages
current and current to voltage of feedback. Inverting and Non
converter circuit using Op-amp. inverting and inverting amplifier,
(04 hrs.) Op-amp as summer, differential
205.Construct and test Instrumentation amplifier. V to I converter and I to
amplifier (05 hrs.) V converter, Instrumentation
206.Identify the pin configuration and amplifier Basics of op- amp
check the output voltage of the applications - integrator,
pins. (03 hrs.) differentiator, Introduction of timers
(555) and its applications. (14hrs.)
207.Construct and test Astable timer
circuit using IC 555. (03 hrs.)
208.Construct and test mono stable
timer circuit using IC 555.
(06 hrs.)
209.Construct and test VCO (V to F
Converter) using IC 555. (05 hrs.)
210.Construct and test 555 timers as
pulse width modulator (05 hrs.)
211. Construct and test automatic
delay on circuit using 555 IC and
other discrete components.
(03 hrs.)
Professional Identify, test and Verify 212.Identify different Logic Gates Number systems; binary, octal,
Skill 150 Hrs. all digital ICs. Assemble, (AND, OR, NAND, NOR, EX-OR, decimal and hexadecimal number
Professional test and troubleshoot EX-NOR, NOTICs) by the number system. Conversion of number
Knowledge various digital circuits printed on them. (05hrs.) systems. Boolean algebra, binary
42Hrs. and digital instruments. 213.Verify the truth tables of all Logic addition, subtraction, multiplication
Gate ICs by connecting switches and division. 1's and 2's
and LEDs. (06hrs.) compliment, BCD code, ASCII
code, gray code. Logic Circuits.
214.Construct and verify the truth table
Basic gates-AND, OR and NOT
of all the gates using NAND and
gates. De-Morgan \s Theorem.
NOR gates. (06hrs.)
Universal gates - NAND and NOR
215.Use digital IC tester to test the gates.
various digital ICs (TTL and
Special gates - Ex-OR, Ex -NOR
CMOS). (07hrs.)
gates and Buffer and its
216.Construct and verify the truth table applications. Basic digital ICs,
of all the gates using DTL circuit. function, digital application, logic
(05hrs.) symbols.
217.Construct Half Adder circuit using Adders - Half adder, full adder
ICs and verify the truth table. Subtractor - Half subtractor, full
(03 hrs.) subtractor.
218.Construct Full adder with two Half Flip flops - RS flip flop, clocked RS
adder circuit using ICs and verify flip flop, JK flip flop, Basics of
the truth table. (04hrs.) Counters and registers. Multiplexer
219.Construct Half subtractor and full and de-- multiplexer.
subtractor circuit using ICs and Encoder and decoder. BCD
verify the truth table. (02 hrs.) display, BCD to decimal decoder.
220.Construct the adder cum BCD to 7 segment display circuits.
subtractor circuit and verify the Digital meters: displays: LED, 7
result. (02hrs.) segment display, LCD, CRT,
221.Identify different Flip-Flop (ICs) electroluminescent displays,
by the number printed on them. electro-phoretic image display,
(03 hrs.) liquid vapor display, dot matrix
display. (28 hrs.)
(xv)
222.Construct and test R-S flipflop
using IC7400 with clock and
without clock pulse. (03 hrs.)
223.Verify the truth tables of JK Flip-
Flop using ICs by connecting
switches and LEDs. (06 hrs.)
224.Construct and test 7493 as a
modulus-12 counter. (04 hrs.)
225.Construct and test a fourbit
Synchronous binary counter using
74163. (05 hrs.)
226.Construct and test synchronous
Decade counter. (04 hrs.)
227.Construct and test an up/down
synchronous decade counter
using 74190 and monitor the
output on LEDs. (04 hrs.)
228.Construct and test a multiplexer
and demultiplexer circuit using
ICs. (04 hrs.)
229.Identify and test common anode
and common cathode seven
segment LED display using multi
meter. (03 hrs.)
230.Construct and test octal to binary
encoder & decoder circuit using
IC 74148 and IC 74132. (03 hrs.)
231.Construct and test decimal to BCD
encoder using IC 74147 and
seven segment LED display.
(04 hrs.)
232.Construct and test seven segment
LED display decoder with IC
7447. (05 hrs.)
233.Measure current flowing through
a resistor and display it on LED
Module. (07 hrs.)
234.Identify different parts, its function
and operation of LCD, CRT,
Electroluminescent displays,
electro-phoretic image display,
liquid vapour display and dot
metrix display. (05hrs.)
235.Identify different parts, its A/D and D/A converters,
function, operation & specification Introduction, weighted register D
of D/A and A/D circuits. (04 hrs.) / A converter, binary(R-2R) ladder
236.Construct and test Digital to D / A converter, specification for
Analog (D/A) Binary Weighted D / A converter, Ramp or counter
resistor converter by using type A/D converter, GPIB (general
opamps. (04 hrs.) purpose interface bus) IEEE -
237.Construct and test Digital to 488, RS 232. (07hrs.)
Analog (D/A) converter using R-
2R ladder network circuit. (04 hrs.)
238.Construct and test Digital Ramp
Analog to Digital Converter (ADC)
circuit. (04 hrs.)
(xvi)
239.Perform the interfacing of IEEE
488.2 standard with a single
controller can control up to 15
different instrument connected
startopology. (03 hrs.)
240.Identify different pins, signal and
source of RS232. (02hrs.)
241.Perform the interfacing of RS232
to the PC. (02 hrs.)
242.Convert RS-485 signals to RS-232
signals using RS-485 to RS-232
converter. (02 hrs.)
243.Identify different parts, its function Digital meters: frequency meter,
and operation of frequency meter, phase measuring meter, and time
phase measuring meter, time measuring instruments. Digital
measuring instrument and digital capacitance meter. (07hrs.)
capacitance meter. (04 hrs.)
244.Identify LED Display module and
its decoder/driver ICs. (03 hrs.)
245.Display a word on a twoline LED.
(03 hrs.)
246.Measure/current flowing through
a sensor and display it on a LED
module (DPM). (03 hrs.)
247.Practice on measuring
instruments in single and three
phase circuits e.g. Phase
sequence meter and Frequency
meter etc. (03 hrs.)
248.Identify the different capacitors
and measure capacitance of
various capacitors using digital
capacitance meter. (04 hrs.)
249.Practice on time measuring
instrument to measure the time in
different electrical control circuit.
(05 hrs.)
Professional Measure the various 250.Identify the different front panel CRO:introduction and applications
Skill 25 Hrs. parameters by CRO and control of a CRO. (06 hrs.) of CRO, functional block diagram
Professional execute the result with 251.Measure the Amplitude, of CRO, CRT power supply.
Knowledge standard one. Frequency and time period of Various types of probes.
07 Hrs. typical electronic signals using Applications of various types of
CRO. (07 hrs.) CROs like dual beamCRO, Dual
252.Take a print of a signal from DSO trace CRO, storage oscilloscope.
by connecting it to a printer and (07 hrs.)
tally with applied signal. (07 hrs.)
253.Identify different types of CRO
probes used to measure the
signals. (05 hrs.)
Professional Install and setup operating 254.Identify PC components and Introduction to Computer, Block
Skill 75 Hrs. system and related devices. (02 hrs.) diagram of PC, software
Professional software in a computer & 255.Practice on windows interface familiarization of Multimedia
Knowledge Practice with MSoffice and and navigating windows. System consisting of CD ROMS,
21 Hrs. application software related (04 hrs.) DVD ROMS, Sound Cards.
to instruments. 256.Customize the desktop settings (07hrs.)
and manage user accounts.
(05 hrs.)
(xvii)
257.View system properties and Computer Hardware, Computer
control panel details. (04 hrs.) systems, computer hardware,
258.Install necessary application CPU, CPU operations, ROMs and
software for windows i.e. office RAMs, I/P and O/P and
package and media player. (03 peripheral equipments, terminals,
hrs.) printers, MODEMS, Data
interface, ADC and DAC.
259.Familiar with Multi Media System
(14 hrs.)
consisting of CD ROMS, DVD
ROMS, Sound Cards. (03 hrs.)
260.Burn data, video and audio files
on CD/DVD using application
software. (04 hrs.)
261.Identify different parts, its
function and operation of CPU.
(05 hrs.)
262.Familiar with different CPU
operations. (08 hrs.)
263.Identify various computer
peripherals and connect it to the
system. (07 hrs.)
264.Dismantle and assemble the
desktop computer system.
(05 hrs.)
265.Replace RAM and ROM from
CPU. (04 hrs.)
266.Install driver for printer and print
document using different
commands. (06 hrs.)
267.Identify different parts, its
function and operation of
modem. (05 hrs.)
268.Install a modem to the computer
to send and receive data over a
telephone line or a cable or
satellite connection. (04 hrs.)
269.Construct and test DAC and ADC
using computer network circuit.
(06 hrs.)
Professional Identify various functional 270.Identify various ICs & their Introduction to microprocessor
Skill 50Hrs. blocks of a microprocessor functions on the given microcomputers, Memories Intel
Professional syste m, identify various Microprocessor Kit. (5hrs.) 8085. Architecture Instruction set
Knowledge I/O Ports, write and 271.Identify the address range of RAM of 8085, Microprocessor.
14Hrs. executive simple program & ROM. (2hrs.) 1. Data transfer group.
and Interface a model 2. Arithmetic group.
272.Measure the crystal frequency,
application with the 3. Logic group.
connect it to the processor.
microprocessor kit and run (07hrs.)
(04hrs.)
the application.
273.Identify the port pins of the
processor & configure the ports
for Input & Output operation.
(04hrs.)
274.Use 8085 microprocessor,
connect 8 LED to the port, blink
the LED with a switch. (05hrs.)
(xviii)
275.Familiar with instruction set of
8085 microprocessor Data
transfer group, Arithmetic group
and Logic group. (05hrs.)
276.Perform addition and subtraction Basic Programming of 8085 such
of two 8-bit numbers using 8085 as adding, subtraction of two 8-bit
microprocessors. (05 hrs.) numbers, etc. Block diagram and
277.Demonstrate entering of simple pin' diagram 8255 and its
programs, execute &monitor the operation. Microprocessor
results. (08 hrs.) applications. (07 hrs.)
278.Write a programme in assemble
language load accumulator with 8-
bit data and transfer the data
accumulator to B register.
(03 hrs.)
279.Write a programme in a assemble
language data to load two 8-bit
data into two memory location
add them result be store in another
memory location. (04 hrs.)
280.Identify different parts, pins
diagram, function and operation
of 8255. (05 hrs.)
(xix)
(xx)
Electronic & Hardware Exercise 2.1.145
Instrument Mechanic - Semi Conductor, Transistors and power supply circuit
Identity different types of diodes, their specifications
Objectives: At the end of this lesson you shall be able to
• identify the diode polority
• check the diode by means of multimeter
• identify the diode type, module and specification.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments
Materials
• Trainees Tool Kit - 1 Set
• Assorted type of Diodes - 10 Nos
• Semi conductor diode data book/manual - 1 No
PROCEDURE
The instructor has to label the different types of
Diodes used for this exercise.
1 Pick one of the labelled diode from the given assorted
lot.
2 Observe the code number printed on the diode and
record in the Table-1.
3 For chosen diode, refer semiconductor data book/
manual and identify the type of diode, semiconductor
material type of package.
4 Also record the maximum Forward Current, If , peak
Inverse Voltage, PIV, forward Voltage Drop, Vf.
5 Repeat step-2 to 4 for all the remaining diodes, and
record it in Table 1.
6 Get the work checked by the Instructor.
Table 1
Label Code Type of Semiconductor Type of Maximum Peak Forward
No. No.of Diode Material Package Forward Inverse Voltage
Diode Current If Voltage Drop Vf
PIV
1
1
Electronics & Hardware Exercise 2.1.146
Test power diode, zener diode and tunnel diode, photo diode
Objectives: At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• test the diode using multimeter observe the voltae
• determine the forward to reverse resistance ratio.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments Materials
• Trainees Tool Kit - 1 Set • Assorted type of
• Multimeter with probes - 1 No (Tunnel, Zener & Photo) Diodes - 10 Nos
• Semi conductor data manual - 1 No • Red colour Sleeve Wire - 1 No
• Patch Cords - 10 Nos
PROCEDURE
The instructor has to label the different types 4 Reverse the meter probe connected to the diode as
of diodes used for this exercise. shown in the Fig 1b and record the reading shown by
the meter in Table-1.
1 Pick one of the labelled diode from the given assorted
lot. 5 From the readings noted in step-3 and step-4 calculate
and record the ratio between Forward resistance (RF)
2 Set the multimeter to x100 range. Carry out resistance
to Reverse resistance (RR).
zero setting of the meter.
6 From the recorded information given conclusion of
3 Connect the multimeter probes across the diode
diode.
terminals as shown in the Fig 1a. Record the resistance
reading shown by the meter in Table-1. • In good diodes, resistance will be less than 100 in one
direction and very high or almost infinity/open in the
other direction.
• In most cases the ratio between low to high resistance
would be at 1:1000.
• If get zero both ways, the diode is shorted.
• If get INFINITY both ways, the diode is open.
7 Repeat step-3 to step-6 for all the remaining diodes,
and record in Table 1.
Table 1
Label Code No.of Forward Reverse Ratio of Servicable/

No. Diode Resistance (FR) Resistance (RR) FR/RR UnServicable
1 Power diode
2 Zener diode
3 Tunnel diode
4 Photo diode
2
Determine V-I characteristics of semiconductor diode
Objective: At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• determine V-I characteristics of semi conducting forward bias and reverse bias.
Requirements
Tools/Equipment/Instrument • Volte meter

• PN Junction diodes, • Ammeter
• RPS resistor, • Bread board, connecting wires.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construction and measurement VI characteristics of PN junction diode
Collect all the required components, test and assemble

S.No Voltage am meted (I) (ma)
Fig 1
1
Reverse bias
The negative terminals of the external battery is connected
to positive terminal is connected to the “N” region.
Fig 4
Forward Bias
Positive terminal of the octernal pattern is connected to
the “P” region and negative terminal is connected to “N”
region as shown in figure No-1 and list the reading in the
table.
Fig 2
S.No Voltage am meted (I) (ma)
Fig 3 Precautions : Connections must be tight

handle given register and diodes as fully take
accurate reaction.
3
Measure the voltage and current through a diode
• find and plot the forward characteristics of a diode.
Requirements
• Trainees Tool Kit - 1 Set • Lugboard - 1 No
• Regulated DC power supply, 0-30V/2A - 1 No • Semiconductor diode, 1N4007 or
• DC milli-ammeter, 0-500mA - 1 No BY127 - 1 No
• DC milli-Voltmeter, 0-1000mV - 1 No • Resistor, 470 /½ watt CR25 - 1 No
• DMM with probes - 1 No • Hook up Wire -2m
• Patch Cords - 10 Nos
PROCEDURE
1 Check to confirm the good physical and electrical 5 At each step record the values of If.
working condition of the given diode.
6 Switch OFF the RPSU. From the recorded values of Vf
2 Identify the Anode and Cathode terminals of the diode. and If, calculate and the forward resistance Rf of the
3 Construct the circuit as shown in Fig 1. diode.
7 From the recorded readings in Table-1, plot a graph of
Vf and If.
8 Take the different reading and put in the tabular
coloumn.
Table 1
• Diode Type Number :
• Forward Resistance of Diode :
• Reverse Resistance of Diode :
4 Switch ON the Regulated Power Supply and increase
• Lamp Resistance :
the output voltage of the RPSU such that the diode drop
Vf varies from 0 to 1V in steps as given in Table-1.
Forward voltage drop across Forward current Forward Diode

Diode Vf in mV If in mA Resistance
100mV
200mV
300mV
400mV
500mV
600mV
700mV
800mV
900mV
1 Volt (1000mV)
4
Measure the voltage and current through a zener diode
• find the forward characteristics of zener diode
• find the reverse characteristics of a zener diode
• to know how to connect the zener diode.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • 12V, 400mw, Zener diode,
• Trainees kit - 1 No 1Z12 or equivalent - 1 No
• Power supply, 0-30V, 1A - 1 No • Resistor 47 , 1/2 - 1 No
• DC milliammeter, 0-50mA - 1 No • Resistors, 2.2K, 1K, 820 ,
560 , 1/4 W - 1 each
Materials • Patch cords - as reqd
• Assorted types of zener diodes - 20 Nos • Lug board (end product of Unit-2) - 1 No
• Wire sleeve, yellow - 5 cms.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Find forward characteristics of zener diode

1 Take one of the given zener diodes. Record its label 7 Collec a 12 volt, 400mw (min) zener. Quick check its
number and the component code number in Table 1. condition, identify and put a yellow sleeve to its
cathode. Refer data manual and record its
2 Check and record the working condition of teh zener
specifications in Table 2 of O & T Sheet.
in a similar way as you test a rectifier diode.
8 Connect the circuit as shown in figure : 1
If you don’t know which terminal (+ve or -ve) of
multimeter is connected to the +ve of the internal
battery, Check using another voltmeter and make
a mark on your meter.
3 From the polarity marking on the body of the zener
and from the test carried out at step 2, identify and
put a yellow sleeve to the cathode terminal of the zener.
4 Refer diode data manual and record the following
specifications of the zener diode under test;
– Nominal zener voltage, Vz
– % tolerance 9 Get the heatness of your wiring checked by instructor.
10 Switch ON PSU and increase the output voltage of
– Maximum power dissipation, Pz(max) the PSU such that the diode drop Vf varies from 0 to
– Zener curent, IZ 1V in step as given in Table 3. At each step record
the values of If.
– Resistance of zener in zener mode, Rz
11 Switch OFF the PSU. For each set of recorded values
– Type of package of V f and I f , calculate and record the forward
resistance Rf of the zener diode.
5 Get the work checked by your instructor
12 From the recorded readings in Table 2, plot a graph
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 for atleast five different types of of Vf and If in O&T sheet.
zener diodes in the given lot.
13 Get your work checked by your instructor.
TASK 2: Find Reverse characteristics of zener diode

1 Wire a test circuit as shown in Fig 2 on a general 2 Vary the input to zener VIN in steps as given in Table
purpose lug board. 3 and at each step record the values of VR, Vz and Iz
in Table 3. After taking readings, switch OFF PSU.
5
3 From the recorded readings in Table 4 calculate and
record the resistance Rz of the zener, and power
dissipated Pz for each set of reading taken.
4 Get the recorded readings checked by your
instructor.
Table - 1
Specifications
Label Zener Condition Nominal % tolerance Max.power Zener Zener Types of
No. code- from zener Pz curent Iz resistance package
number quick voltage Vz Rz
test
Table - 2
Specifications
Types of
Code Condition Zener code Condition Nominal % tolerance Max.power Zener Zener package
No. number from quick zener Pz curent Iz resistance
test voltage Vz Rz
Table - 3 Table - 4
Calculated value of Calculated value of
V in VR Iz Vz Rz Pz V in VR Iz Vz Rz Pz
dc volts volts mA volts dc volts volts mA volts
6 Electronics & Hardware: Instrument Mechanic (NSQF Level - 5) - Exercise 2.1.149

Identify and check different type of transistors and specification
• identify transistor by different package type, pin configuration
• identify power, switching transistor, heat sinks etc from the data manuals/books.
Requirements
• Trainees Tool Kit - 1 Set • Different types of transistor packages
• Transistor databook - as reqd from T0-1, T0-5, T0-18, T0-39, T0-72,
• Multimeter/DMM with probes - 1 No T0-92, T0-3, T0-66, T0-126, T0-202,
T0-220, T0-3P, T0-247 - 15 No
• Different Heat sinks suitable for above
transistors - 10 No
Note:
1 The Instructor has to select and label the transistors used for this exercise.
2 A minimum of one number in each type of package has to be arranged.
3 Label the heat sinks also in the similar way
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Identification of transistor by different package type, pin configuration, power rating, type of transistor
& heat sink
1 Pick one of the Labelled transistors from given assorted in the above Table 1 and select the heat sink suitable
lot, identify the code number, and record them in for the transistor in hand.
Table 1.
4 Record the heat sink type in Table 1 and repeat the
2 Refer to the Chart 1 semiconductor data book, identify above step for remaining labelled transistors.
the type of package, all other details as required in
Table 1 and record them. 5 Some metallic transistor have notch on its surface.
Identify the mark or notch available in transistor.
3 Refer to the Chart 2, different types of heat sinks used (Terminal adjacent to the notch or mark will be emitter.)
for transistors, compare, verify the details of a transistor
Table 1
Curent & Voltage
Sl.No. Label No Transistor Transistor Package Current Voltage Power Suitable
code number package diagram with rating rating rating Heatsink
type pin description type
7
CHART 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
TO-1 TO-5 TO-18 TO-39 TO-3 TO-3P
1
2 3
C B E 1 3
CB E C B E 2
7 8 9 9a 9b 9c 10
TO-66 TO-72 TO-92 TO-92a TO-92b TO-92c TO-106
3
1
2 E E C
E B C C B B C B E` C
SOME TO-92 B E
DEVICES ARE
ECB
11 12 13 13a 14
TO-126 TO-202 TO-220 TO-220AB TO-247
E
C B
12 3 B
C E 12
BC E 3
DIFFERENT TRANSISTOR PACKAGES

CHART 2
Chart showing different types of heatsinks used for transistor packages
Electronics & Hardware: Instrument Mechanic (NSQF Level - 5) - Exercise 2.1.150 9

Construct fixed bias, emitter bias, and voltage divider bias transistor amplifier
• construct and test fixed bias arrangement to transistor amplifier circuit
• construct and test emitter bias arrangement to transistor amplifier circuit
• construct and test voltage divider bias arrangement to transistor amplifier circuit.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Capacitor
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set 1 mF/25V - 1 No
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No 10kpf - 2 Nos
• CRO, 20 MHz, Dual Trace - 1 No 25mF/25V - 2 Nos
• Regulated DC Power Supply, • Resistor/¼ W/CR25
0- 30V/2A - 1 No 220kW - 1 No
• AF signal generator - 1 No 5.1kW - 1 No
• DC micro ammeter 0-500 mA - 1 No 1.5kW - 2 Nos
• DC miliammeter 0-30 mA - 1 No 5.6kW - 1 No
12kW - 1 No
Materials 120W - 1 No
• Breadboard - 1 No 470W - 1 No
• Transistor BC 107, SL100 - 1 No each 1kW - 3 Nos
• Hook up wires - as reqd
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Construction and testing of fixed bias arrangement for transistor amplifier circuit using BJT
1 Collect all the components required and check them 6 Observe and record the values of IB, IC and VCE for
for good working condition using multimeter. the fixed bias amplifier circuit in Table-1.
2 Assemble the circuit as shown in Fig 1. 7 Compare the calculated values with the observed
values.
8 Get the values checked by the Instructor.
Note:
1 We assume that the Amplifier operation is in
the active region, and hence VBE= 0.7 V.
2 is the amplification factor of the transistor
by which the base current gets amplified.
3 dc refers to current gain, when DC bias
voltage is applied.
4 Output collector current ‘IC’ = dc x IB.
3 Calculate base current ‘IB’ using the formula. 5 When transistor is in active region, IC
gradually increases towards higher values.
At the same time, VCE decreases from peak
towards lower values.
6 When saturation is attained by amplifier, IC
4 Now switch - ON the DC supply to the circuit and goes to peak but VCE drops to less than 0.7V.
record readings in Table 1 without signal.
7 For calculating IC and VCE , following formulae
5 Prepare CRO for measurement and apply AF signal should be used.
kHz/20mV sine wave from AF signal generator as
input. VCE = VCC - IC.RC Say = 100 &
10
Table 1
Input condition Base Current Collector VCE Voltage Current gain AV = Vc
IB current IC Ai = IC / IB Vin
Without signal
With input
Signal
TASK 2 : Construction and testing of emitter feedback bias amplifier circuit using BJT
1 Modify the circuit as shown in Fig 2. 2 Calculate the values of IB, IC bdc and VCE by using the
formulae given in the note and record the values in
Table 2.
3 Switch ON the 12V DC supply and AF signal generator
input to the circuit assembled and measure base
current IB, collector current IC,VBE (forwad bias of
transistor) and the voltage drops across base resistor
RB the emitter resistor RE, collector resistor RC and
VCE record the observed values in Table 3.
Table 2
Calculated Collector Base VCE Current Volatage
Observed Current IC current IB gain Ai ( dc
) gain AV
values
Calculated
values
Observed
values
4 Prepeare CRO for measurements, connect and 4 If dc increases, the collector current
observe the peak-to-peak AC signal input from AF increases, which in turn increases the voltage
signal generators at CH1 and amplified AC signal at the emitter.
output of the emitter feedback bias amplifier circuit
at CH-2 and record the readings. 5 This increased emitter voltage (plus the
VBE drop of transistor) decreases the
5 Increase the input A/C signal voltage applied to emitter voltage across the base-resistor.
feedback amplifier gradually and repeat the
observations of the parameters given in step 3. 6 There fore base current reduces, and hence
collector current reduces. This prevents IC
6 Note that the collector current ‘IC’ remains stable to from action varying continuosly.
maintain constant ‘Q’ - operating point of the amplifier.
7 Get the values checked by the Instructor. IB =
(
Vcc − VBE + VE )
RB
8 Calculate and record the IC (sat) of the emitter-bias
circuit 7 It partially offsets the original increase in IC
9 Get the values checked by the Instructor due to increased dc. Due to feedback only
the output ‘IC’ could change the input IB this
Note: maintain stable Q print.
1 Emitter bias is also refered to as emitter 8 In emitter-bias, the current ‘IC’ will be
feedback back bias (i.e) a portion of the
output is given back to the input as feedback. IC - IB
(i.e) IC =
2 In this circuit, the voltage across resistor

‘RE’ is used to offset changes is dc.
3 This type of biasing compensates for the
variation in dc and keeps the ‘Q’ point fairly Assuming IE IC ; VCE - (RC + RE) IC
stable.
Table 3
AF Signal Generator - AC input = Sinewave 1kHz/20mV
Value/ Base Current Collector Current gain VBE VCE DRB Drop Drop
signal IB current = IC across across
condition IC IB RE RC
Calculated
Value
Measured
Values
Without
Signal
With signal
TASK 3 : Construction and testing of voltage divider biased transistor CE amplifier

1 Check all the components and assemble the circuit as 4 Apply AC input signal of 1 kHz, 20 mV from AF signal
shown in Fig 3. generator to the voltage divder biased CE amplifier.
5 Prepare the CRO for measurements connect CRO to
observe/measure AC signal input to amplifier from AF
signal generator to CH-1 and amplified AC signal
output of voltage divider bias to CH-2.
6 Measure and record the observed values as required
in Table 5. Calculate & record Ai and Av of the amplifier
observe and record the Input/Output waveforms
available on the CRO.
Note:
• In this circuit note that the base of the
transistor is biased by voltage divider
network made up of R1 & R2.
• Q point of this circuit lies half way along the
2 Get the assembled circuit checked by the Instructor.
transistor’s load line.
3 Measure and record IB and IC in Table 4, calculate
• VCE = VCC - IC (RC+RE) and IC = bxIB
current gain bdcand record it.
• RB << (b+1) RE and RB = R1 // R2.
Table 4
Collector Base Current gain Ai
current IC current IB dc
Table 5
Signal Base Collector dc
Voltage drop Across VBE VCE Voltage gain
Condition current current
IB IC R1 R2 RC RE
Without
signal
With
signal

Construct and test a CE amplifier with and without emitter bypass capacitors
• construct and test fixed bias arrangement to transistor amplifier circuit
• construct and test emitter bias arrangement to transistor amplifier circuit
• construct and test voltage divider bias arrangement to transistor amplifier circuit.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Resistor/¼W/CR25
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set 1kW,1.2 kW, 5.6 kW
• CRO, 20 MHz Dual trace - 1 No 120W, 470W - 1 No each
• AF Signal generator - 1 No • Capacitors
• Regulated DC power supply, 30V/2A - 1 No 25 mF/25V - 2 Nos
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No 4.7 mF/25V - 1 No
Materials 100 mF/25V - 1 No
470 mF/25V - 1 No
• Hook-up wires - as reqd
• Breadboard - as reqd
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Construction and testing of the effect of bypass capacitor in CE amplifier

1 Collect all the components, test them assemble the 5 Find the input impedance Zin and output impedance
circuit as shown in Fig 1 on breadboard. Capacitor Zout of the amplifier using the same procedure as
CE is the emitter by pass capacitor. followed for Task 2 of Ex. 2.1.106; Record values in
Table 1.
6 Measure and record the AC and DC voltages at
various points of the amplifier in Fig 2 and Fig 3.
7 Switch off DC supply to the circuit. Disconnect 100
mF capacitor connected across the 120W emitter
resistor.
Now the input Vin may show higher value due
to increased Zin without the bypass capacitor.
Do not alter the output level / frequency of the
signal generator.
8 Switch ‘ON’ DC supply to the circuit, repeat steps 4
and record readings in Table 1.
2 Get the circuit connections checked by the Instructor. 9 Measure and record the AC and DC levels at various
points of the amplifier without the bypass capacitor
3 Preapare the CRO for measurements and switch ‘ON’ in Fig 3.
12V DC supply to the circuit, adjust the output of the
signal generator at 1kHz such that Vout is large enough 10 Switch-OFF DC supply to the circuit and from the
and undistorted. recorded readings, complete the sentences given in
record sheet.
4 Record the peak to peak values of input Vin and output
Vout in Table 1; Calculate and record the voltage gain 11 Get the work checked by the Instructor.
Av of the amplifer.
Table - 1
Condition Vin(peak-to-peak) Vout(peak-to-peak) Av Zin Zout
With bypass capacitor CE
connected across RE
Without bypass capacitor CE
13
12 Complete the sentences given below with the readings recorded in Table 1.
When the emitter bypass capacitor was removed
a) the voltage gain of the amplifier decreased by ______________%.
b) the input impedance of the amplifier ______________ by ______________%.
TASK 2 : Plotting the frequency response of CE amplifier

1 Modify the circuit to confirm to the schematic diagram
as given in Fig 4.
2 Set the output of the signal generator to sine wave,
1 KHz. Adjust the input voltage to the transistor
Vin = 200mV.
3 Record the set input level Vin and corresponding value
of output Vout of the amplifier in the appropriate row of
the Table 2.
4 Vary the output frequency of the signal generator
above and below the set frequency of 1 kHz in steps
as given in Table 2. At each step record the output of
amplifier, Vout.
5 Calculate and record the voltage gain AV of the amplifier
at different frequencies.
6 Change the value of CC(in) to 4.7μF and repeat steps 2
to 5.
7 Plot the graph of frequency (fin) versus voltage gain
AVfor the readings taken with the capacitor values of 9 Change value of the bypass capacitor CE to 0.47μF and
0.047 and 4.7 μF in Table 2. Find and mark the low repeat steps 2 to 5, record readings in Table 3.
frequency cut off/half power point on the graph. 10 Change the value of the bypass capacitor CE back to
The cut off/half power point is 0.707 AV at the 470μF and repeat steps 2 to 5.
mid-band gain. 11 Find the dominant lower cut off frequency of the
8 Switch OFF DC supply to the circuit; change the value amplifier with CC(in) = 4.7μF and CE = 470μF.
of the input coupling capacitor CC(in) to 100 μF. The effect of CC(out) on the amplifier frequency
CC(in) is made 100μF to eliminate the effect of response is not given in the procedure as the
the cou-pling capacitor while finding the effect effect of CC(out) is almost same as that of CC(in).
of CE on the frequency response.

Table - 2 Table - 3
Frequency response for different Ccin
Frequency response for different CE
Set value of Vin = ______________ at
Set value of Vin = ______________ at
fin = 1 kHz CE = 470 F CCout = 4.7 F
fin = 1 kHz CCin = 100 F CCout = 4.7 F
frequency CCin= 0.047 F CCin = 4.7 F
frequency CE= 0.47 F CE = 470 F
fin
fin
HZ Vout AV Vout AV
HZ Vout AV Vout AV
10
10
20
20
30
30
100
100
200
200
400
400
800
800
1000
1000
1200
1200
1400
1400
1600
1600
2000
2000
3000
3000
Graph 1 12 Get the work checked by the Instructor.

Frequency response with Ccin = 0.047capacitor
Graph 2
Frequency response with Ccin = 4.7 F

Construct and test a Common Base amplifier

• construct a common base amplifier and measure,
– current gain, of the amplifier
– voltage gain of the amplifier
– input-impedance of the amplifier
– output-impedance of the amplifier
– power gain of the amplifier
• compare the phase relationship between Input and Output of common base amplifier.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Components • Resistors/¼ W/CR25
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set 1kW - 1 No
• DC milliammeter, 0-10mA - 1 No 1.2kW - 1 No
• Regulated DC power supply 0-30V/2A - 1 No 2.2kW - 1 No
• CRO, 20 MHz Dual trace - 1 No 3.3kW - 1 No
• AF signal generator - 1 No 6.8kW - 1 No
• Multimeter /DMM with probes - 1 No 10kW - 1 No
• Capacitors
Materials
25 mF/25V - 2 Nos
• Breadboard - 1 No 100 mF/25V - 1 No
• Transistor, SL 100 - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construction and measurement of Ai, Av, Zin and Zout in CB amplifier
1 Collect all the required components, test and assemble 4 Calculate and record values of, input impedance Zin,
the common base amplifier as shown in Fig 1. output impedance Zout, voltage gain Av in Table 2.
Use the value of Ai found in step 3. Find the
value of r’e using the formula, r’e = 25mV/IE.
5 Modify the circuit as shown in Fig 2 and prepare the
CRO for measurements.

3 Switch ON 12V DC supply to the circuit, measure and
record the dc voltage levels of VRE, VBE, VCB and VCE;
From the readings, conclude whether the
transistor is working or not. 6 Set the output of the Signal generator to Sine wave,
Record the values of input current IE and output current 1kHz at 500mV. Measure and record Vin and Vout of the
amplifier. Calculate and record the voltage gain AV of
IC. Calculate and record the current gain Ai of the the amplifier in Table 3; draw the input and output
common base amplifier in Table 1 using the formula waveforms in the graph sheets.
16
7 Measure and record the input impedance Zin and output 9 Compare the calculated readings at step 4 and the
indepence Zout of the common base amplifier in the actual values measured.
same way as found in common emitter amplifiers
Ex.No. 2.1.107.
8 Calculate and record the power gain of the common
base amplifier using the above readings.
Table 1
Current gain Ai of CB amplifier
VBG VBE VCB VCE Condition IE IC Current gain
of transistor Ai (or) a
Table 2
Calculated values using given circuit component
values
r’ e Zin Zout Av Ap
Table 3
Frequency set to 1 kHz , sine wave
Vin Vout Voltage gain Input impedance Output Impedance Power gain
AV Zin Zout AP
Graph of Input/output phase relationship

Note: Make rough sketches of wave-forms using pencil.
Amplifiers Amplifiers Remarks on input-output
input waveform output waveform phase relationship
TASK 2 : Comparison of phase relationship between input and output

1 Adjust the signal generator output for maximum 3 Switch ‘ON’ 12V DC supply to the circuit, observe and
undistorted Vout. sketch the waveform in graph sheet as in Table 4.
2 Prepare the CRO for measurement and connect Ch- 4 Record the remarks on the phase relationship between
1 of CRO at input point (across signal generator) and input and output waveforms. (Inphase/out of phase)
Ch-2 at the output point (across RL).

Construct a single stage amplifier and measure current gain, voltage gain
• measure curent gain of a single stage amplifier
• measure voltage gain of a single stage amplifier
• measure the power gain of a single amplifier.
Requirements
• Tag board code no. 110-03-TB - 1 Set • Trainees kit
• Transistor, SL100 or equivalent - 1 No • Oscilloscope, 20 MHz, Dual trace - 1 No
• Diode IN914/OA79 - 1 No • AF Signal generator
• Capacitor, 100 F/25 V, electrolytic, axial- 1 No • Regulated DC power supply
• Potentiometer, 10 K , carbon - 1 No (End product of Ex.9.13) - 1 No
• Resistors 1/4W, carbon • DC microammeter, 0-500μA - 2 Nos
120 - 1 No • DC millammeter, 0-30mA - 2 Nos
470 - 1 No
1K - 1 No
1.2K - 1 No
5.6K - 1 No
• Hook-up wires - 1 No
• Rosin-cored solder, 22 gauge - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Current gain Ai of CE amplifier

1 Construct the circuit of a CE amplifier as shown in
Fig 1.
2 Apply VCC. Measure and Record Ic and IB in Table 1 of
O & T sheet.
3 Calculate and record the values of current gain Ai of
the amplifier. Get it checked by your instructor.
TASK 2: Voltage gain Av of the amplifier

1 Construct a CE amplifier as shown in the schematic
diagram at Fig 2.
2 Get the wired circuit checked by your instructor before
applying voltage to the circuit.
3 Set the output of the Sig. Gen. to 1 KHz, sine wave.
Adjust the signal generator output level such that the
output wave-form seen on CRO is maximum and is
undistorted. Get it checked by your instructor.
4 Measure the peak-to-peak values of input ac Vin and
output ac Vout of the circuit. Record your readings in
O & T sheet.
18
5 From the recorded readings, calculate and record the 6 Get the readings checked by your instructor.
voltage gain Av of the amplifier.
TASK 3: Calculating power gain Ap of the amplifier

1 Using CRO, measure the input voltage (peak) Vx at At this stage DON’T change the input signal level Vin to
point X and VY at point Y. Record your readings in the the amplifier.
O & T sheet.
6 Adjust 10K pot such that the output level Vout seen on
2 Find the input current iin using Ohm’s law as given CRO, shows half the value of Vout measured and
below, recorded at step 4.
iin = Vx - VY 7 Switch OFF DC supply to the circuit. Remove the pot
R1 from the circuit without disturbing the adjusted value of
3 Calculate and record the input imedance Zin of the the pot. Measure the adjusted resistance value of the
amplifier using the formula. pot. Record this value as the out put impedance Zout of
the amplifier in the O & T sheet.
input impedance, Zin = Vin
i in 8 From the recorded readings, calculate the power gain
of the CE amplifier using the formulae.
Vin is nothing but the voltage VY measured at step 1.
Input power to the amplifier, Pin = Vin2
4 Measure the value of amplified ac Vout (p-p) at the output Zin
of the amplifier and record in the O & T sheet.
Output power of the amplifier, Pout = Vout2
5 Connect temporarily a 10K pot across the output of the
amplifier as shown in Fig 3. Zout
Amplifier power gain A P in = Pout
P in
Amplifier power gain A P in decibels (dB) = 10 log Pout
P in
9 Calculate amplifier power gain Ap from the calculated
values of Ai and Av at tasks 1 and 2. Record the power
gain Ap of the amplifier.

Identify different power electronic components, specification and terminals

• identity the terminals of FET, UJT and its specification using data manual
• identify the terminals of SCR, TRIAC, DIAC and its specification using data manual.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments Material
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Assorted types of N-Channel FET - 3 Nos
• Semiconductor data manual for • Assorted types of SCR - 3 Nos
the active devices used for • Assorted types of UJT - 2 Nos
this exercise - as reqd • Assorted types of TRIAC - 2 Nos
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No • Assorted types of DIAC - 2 Nos
Aids: Chart showing the pin out • Plastic sleeves (2mm dia)-Red,
diagram of active devices used for Green, Yellow, Black - 1 M each
this exercise - as reqd
Note: The instructor has to label the active devices used for this exercise
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identification of leads of given FETs and its specifications using Data manual
1 Collect the components and pick a labelled FET from - Maximum forward gate current, IG.
the assorted lot record the code number of the FET and
- Pinch-off Voltage (at ID =0), VP.
enter against its label number in Table 1.
- Maximum power dissipation, Pmax
2 Draw the pinout package diagram, refer to the chart/
data manual/identify and record the following important 3 Put sleeves of suitable length to the leads following the
specification of the FET based on its type Number, colour scheme given below.
package type, Drain - Red
- Polarity of the device (N-type/P-type) Source - Green
- Maximum drain-source Voltage, VDS Gate - Yellow
- Maximum gate-source Voltage, VGS Shield - Black
- Maximum drain current, ID. 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for the remaining labelled FETs.
Table 1
Sl. Label FET No. Type VDS VGS ID IG VP Pmax Package/
No. diagram
pintout
1
2
3
TASK 2 : Identifications of UJT by its code number

1 Pick a labelled UJT, record the code number, refer to 3 Check the physical inspection of the given
the data manual find and record the specification of components.
the given UJTs in Table 2.
2 Draw the pinout/package diagram and mark the
terminal.
20
Table 3
Sl. Label No Code number VRRM- IT(RMS)- ITSM IGT VGT IH Package/
No. of SCR pinout
diagram
1
2
3
TASK 4 : Identification of leads of given TRIAC and its specifications using data manual
1 Pick a labelled TRIAC from the given lot, record the 3 Repeat above steps for the remaining labelled TRIAC
code number of the TRIAC against its label number and record the observations in Table 4.
in Table 4.
2 Draw the pinout/package diagram, refer to the chart/
data manual, identify and record the important
specifications used on the code number in Table 4.
Table 4
Sl. Label No. Code number Votage off Current Voltage gate Current gate Package
No. state on-state (It) trigger (Vgt) trigger (Igt) pinout diagram
1
2
TASK 5 : Identification of leads of given DIAC and its specifications using data manual
1 Pick a labelled DIAC from the given lot, record the 3 Repeat above steps for the remaining labelled DIACs
code number against its label number in Table 5. and record the observations in Table 5.
2 Draw the package/terminal diagram, refer to the
datasheet, identify and record the important
specifications of the DIAC in Table 5.
Table 5
Sl.No Label No. Code number VBO ITRM Tj Package pinout diagram
1
2

Construct and test a FET Amplifier

• construct a voltage amplifier using a JFET
• measure the gain of JFET amplifier with different input voltages
• calculate the gain of the amplifier at different frequencies.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments Aids: Semiconductor data manual/
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set data sheet of the FET - as reqd
• Regulated DC power supply • Capacitors
0-30V/2A - 1 No 5.6 nF/25V DC - 1 No
• Function generator - 1 No 270 nF/25V DC - 1 No
• Soldering iron 25W/240VAC - 1 No 6.8 μF/25V - 1 No
• Oscilloscope 0-20 MHz Dual trace - 1 No • Resistors, ¼ W/CR25
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No 10 kW - 1 No
12 kW - 1 No
Materials
47 kW - 1 No
• Assorted types of N-channel JFET - 4 Nos 1 MW - 1 No
• Plastic sleeves • Solder, flux - as reqd
Red, Green, Yellow, Black - 4 Nos • Hook up wires - as reqd
(each of 10mm length)
One of the given JFET should be a BF 245B or BFW 10 or equivalent.
TASK 1 : Construction and testing of FET amplifier

1 Collect the required components, test and assemble Table 1
the FET amplifier as shown in Fig 1.
Input frequency : 10 kHz
Construct the circuit on a bread board or on a Output voltage
Sl. Input O/P voltage Gain=
GPCB. No. voltage Input voltage
(mV)
1 100
2 200
3 300
4 400
5 500
6 600
7 700
8 800
9 900
10 1000
7 Increase the input voltage in steps of 100 mV upto 1V,
2 Get the assembled circuit checked by the instructor. record the observation in Table 1.
3 Switch ON the 12 VDC to the circuit. 8 Calculate gain for each setting of input and record
them.
4 Set the function generator output with sinewave at 10
kHz, 100 mVp-p as the input to the FET amplifier. 9 Get the work checked by the Instructor.
5 Prepare the CRO for measurements and observe the

output across the RL.
6 Record the output reading in Table 1.
22
TASK 2 : Measurement of gain of FET amplifier at different frequencies
1 Set the function generator output with sinewave at 20 3 Increase the signal frquency from 20 kHz in steps of
kHz- 400 mV, switch ON the FET amplifier 20 kHz, measure the output voltage and record the
2 Measure the output across RL using CRO and record readings in Table 2.
the readings in Table 2. 4 Calculate the gain for each setting of input and record
Table 2 them.
Input volt 400mV 5 Get the work checked by the Instructor.

Output voltage
Frequency O/P Gain =
kHz Voltage Input voltage
40
80
100
120
150

Identify various power MOSFETs by its number and test

• identify given MOSFET type by its number and test MOSFET using multimeter.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • MOSFET IRF 540 - 1 No
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No IRF Z44 - 1 No
• MOSFET Data book - 1 No IRF 840 - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identification of the given MOSFET by its number and testing with a multimeter
MOSFET is easily destroyed with static Table 1
electricity, always ground yourself before Sl. MOSFET VGD VDS VGS Condition of
working with one. No. No. MOSFET
1 Note down the number, specification & type of given
MOSFET by using MOSFET data book.
2 Identify which pins of the MOSFET are its source, 5 Now move the positve probe to the ‘Drain’. You should
gate and drain leads. Look up the device’s part get a ‘low’ reading. The MOSFET’S internal
number in the MOSFET data book to verify its leads capacitance on the gate has now been charged up
layout. by the meter and the device is ‘turned-ON’.
3 For testing the MOSFET using multimeter, hold the 6 With the meter positive still connected to the drain,
MOSFET by the case or the tab but don’t touch the touch a finger between source and gate (and drain if
metal parts of the test probes with any of the other you like, it does not matter at this stage). The gate will
MOSFET’S terminals until needed. Do not allow a be discharged through your finger and the meter
MOSFET to come in contact with your clothes, plastic reading should go high, indicating a non-conductive
or plastic products, etc. because of the high static device/high resistance condition.
voltages it can generate.
The above test means that, actually testing the
cut-off voltage, which is basically the highest
voltage put on the gate without making it
conduct.
7 If the meter reading is low on both sides of VGS (or)
VDS, then MOSFET is short circuted/defective.
4 First, touch the multimeter positive lead onto the

MOSFET’S ‘Gate’ and negative lead onto the source.
This testing procedure is for use with a digital
multimeter in the diode test-range with a
minimum of 3.3 volt over diode-under-test. If
your multi-meter battery is less than that it
will not do the test. Check your meter for the
specification.
24
Table 2
Resistance
UJT No. Conclusion
B1 & B2 B1 & G B2&G
Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Forward Reverse

Identify different heatsinks test circuit with a small load

• construct MOSFET test circuit with a small land
• identify different shapes and sizes of heatsinks used for power MOSFETs.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • MOSFET Data book - 1 No
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Resistor 100 Ohm/ ¼ W/CR25 - 1 No
• Regulated DC power suply 0-30V/2A - 1 No • Resistor 68k /¼ W/CR25 - 1 No
• Multimeter with probes - 1 No • ON/OFF Switch - 2 Nos
• Semi conductor data manual - 1 No • Socket for MOSFET - 1 No
• 12V lamp - 1 No
Materials • Hook up wires - as reqd
• MOSFET (assorted number) (TO-3P) - 5 Nos • Solder flux - as reqd
• Resistor 1k , ¼ W/CR25 (TO-220) - 1 No • Connecting wires - as reqd
• Heat sinks for given MOSFET (TO-247) - 5 Nos • PCB/Bread board - 1 No
Note:
1 The Instructor has to provide minimum on MOSFET in each package type with label for each one.
2 Label all the heat sinks provided with label numbers.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identify different shapes and sizes of heat sinks used power MOSFET
1 Pick one of the labelled MOSFET, identify the rating 4 Repeat the above steps for all the labelled items in
current capacity & junction to case thermal resistance Table 1 & 2.
of given MOSFET from data sheet record the
parameters in Table 1. Typically an aluminum heatsink, with fins to
increase the surface area, is used to dissipate
2 Identify the heat sink required for given MOSFET this energy to air. Higher current capacity
according to current capacity of MOSFET with controllers use a fan to force the air to pass
reference to the chart 1. through the fins in order to increase heat
3 Draw the pictorial diagram & note down the dissipation.Water cooled heatsinks are used
specification of heat sink selected in Table 2. on MOSFET with very high current ratings.
Table 1
Sl. Label Code no package Voltage Current Junction Remarks
No. No. on MOSFET type rating rating temperature
1
2
3
4
5
Table 2
Sl. Heatsink Suitable Package Heatsink 5 Get the work checked by the Instructor.
No. label no. for MOSFET type outline
number number diagram
1
2
3
4
5
26
1 2 3
4
5 6
7
9
8
11
10
12 13
14 15

TASK 2:
1 Check the working condition of all given components that lamp glows. This means MOSFET is turned ON.
with multimeter. Note down the status of lamp in Table 1.
2 Assemble the circuit on bread board as shown in the 5 Thus MOSFET act as open switch if gate voltage is
circuit Fig 1. zero. If gate voltage is applied then the MOSFET will
act as closed switch then the working condition of
MOSFET is good/ON.
6 If the MOSFET is P-channel then reverse the polarity
of power supply and lamp load then check the
condition of lamp load.
Table 1
Sl. MOSFET Type Status of MOSFET
No. No. lamp ON/OFF Condition
3 Insert MOSFET (to be checked) in socket.

4 Power on the supply, Press switch S and observe

Identify different types of transformers and test

• identify different types of transformer by appearance.
• identify different types of transformer by using multimeter.
Requirements
• Trainees Tool Kit - 1 Set • Assorted type of Transformers - 10 Nos
• Multimeter with probes - 1 No • Cotton Waste - ½ kg
• Types of Transformer Chart - 1 No
PROCEDURE
The instructor has to label the different types of 3 Find the HT and LT winding by measuring resistance
transformers like, Low voltage step-down with the ohm meter/multimeter/DMM.
transformer, EHT transformer of T V, IFT, Auto
transformer. 4 Draw the symbol of the each transformer in Table-1.
Observe the resistance value of windings using
1 Take one of the labelled transformer from the given lot. multimeter record it in Table 1.
Enter its label number in Table-1.
5 Repeat steps-2 to steps-4 for the remaining
2 For the given transformer, from its appearance, shape transformers.
of core, etc., identify the type of the transformer, rated
voltage and record details in the Table-1. 6 Get the work checked by the Instructor.
Table 1
Label Name of the Voltage rating Measured Type/shape Symbol
No. Transformer Resistance value of core
H.T L.T H.T L.T
29
Identify the primary and secondary windings of transformer and test the polarity
• read and interpret the name plate details of single phase transformer
• find out the polarity of the transformer.
Requirements
Tools/Instruments
• MI Voltmeter 0-300V - 2 Nos • MI Ammeter 0-100mA - 1 No
• Ohmmeter 0-500W - 1 No • Push button switch - 1 No
• MI Ammeter 0-10A - 1 No • 12 V battery - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identify the primary and secondary winding of a transformer.

1 Find out the corresponding terminals and two windings 2 Determine HT & LT winding by measuring resistances
(HT & LT) with ohm meter as shown in Fig 1 by with the ohmmeter.
checking the continuity.
LT windings will have low resistance;mark
accordingly.
3 Record resistance of both parts
1st pair ———— ohms. This is HT/LT winding
2nd pair———ohms. This is HT /LT winding
TASK 2: Test the polarity of a transformer

1 Connect DC supply to HT through push button switch. 3 Mark HT terminals as A1 and A2.
2 Connect voltmeter to LT as shown in Fig 2. 4 Mark LT terminals as a1 and a2.
5 Press the push button switch.
6 Observe the deflection of the pointer of the voltmeter.
If the pointer deflects in the right direction, retain the
markings made on terminals.
7 Change the voltmeter connections made to LT
terminals and change the marking made on LT
terminals if the deflection is in the reverse direction.
8 Now press the push button switch once again and
observe that the voltmeter deflecting in right direction.
30
Construct and test a Half-wave, Full wave and Bridge rectifier circuit
• construct and test a half-wave rectifier
• construct and test a two diode full-wave rectifier
• construct and test a full-wave bridge rectifier.
Requirements
• Step-down Transformer,
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set 230V/12V/500mA - 1 No
• Oscilloscope 0-30MHz, Dual Trace • Centre tapped Step-down
with probe kit - 1 No Transformer, 230V/12-0-12V/500mA - 1 No
• Multimeter with probes - 1 No • Main cord with Three Pin Plug - 1 No
Materials • Resistor, 470W/1W CR25 - 1 No
• Hook up Wire -5m
• Lug Board/PCB - 1 No
• Semiconductor diode, 1N4007 or
By127 - 4 Nos
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construction and Testing of a Half-Wave rectifier
1 Check to confirm the good condition of the given 7 Record the difference in the calculated and measured
components. values.
2 Using Lug board/PCB, construct the Half-wave rectifier 8 Connect the two channel input probes of the CRO. Set
as shown in Fig 1. the Volt/div and Time/div of CH-1 and CH-2 such that
3 Connect AC mains to the Transformer and switch ON the two waveforms are seen clearly.
mains. 9 From the displayed waveforms on the screen, measure
4 Measure and record the mains voltage and transformer and record the following parameters;
secondary AC voltage VS(rms) to the rectifier in the a Peak value of Source Voltage VS (Input Volt to
Table-1. Rectifier).
5 Calculate the expected DC voltage Vdc across the load b Frequency of Source Voltage VS.
resistor RL using the formula,
c Peak value of pulsating DC - Vdc.
Vdc = 0.45VS(rms)
10 Frequency of Pulsating DC - Vdc.
Where, VS(rms) is the AC input to the rectifier.
6 Measure and record the rectifier output DC voltage Vdc
across RL using multimeter/Voltmeter.
Table 1
• Type of Transformer :
• Rated Primary Voltage :
• Rated Secondary Voltage :
Mains Secondary Calculated Measured Difference Peak Frequency Peak Frequency
supply voltage Vdc Vdc between value of VS Value of pulsating
voltage VS(rms) (3) and (4) VS of pulsa Vdc
ting Vdc
31
TASK 2: Construction and Testing of a two diode Full-Wave rectifier
1 Construct the two diode Full-wave rectifier as shown in 6 Record the difference in the calculated and measured
Fig 2. values.
2 Connect AC mains to the centre tapped Transformer 7 Connect the two channel input probes of the CRO. Set
and switch ON mains. the Volt/div and Time/div of CH-1 and CH-2 such that
3 Measure and record the mains voltage and transformer the two waveforms are seen clearly.
secondary AC voltage VS(rms) to the rectifier in the 8 From the displayed waveforms on the screen, measure
Table-2. and record peak value of Source Voltage VS (Input Volt
4 Calculate the expected DC voltage Vdc across the load to Rectifier), frequency of Source, Voltage VS, peak
resistor RL using the formula, value of pulsating DC - Vdc, frequency of Pulsating DC
- Vdc.
Vdc=0.9VS(rms)
Where, VS(rms) is the AC input to the rectifier.
5 Measure and record the rectifier output DC voltage Vdc
across RL using multimeter/Voltmeter.

Table 2
ting Vdc
TASK 3: Construction and Testing of four diode full wave bridge rectifier
1 Construct the Full-wave Bridge rectifier as shown in 6 Record the difference in the calculated and measured
Fig 3. values.
2 Connect AC mains to the Transformer and switch ON 7 Connect the two channel input probes of the CRO. Set
mains. the Volt/div and Time/div of CH-1 and CH-2 such that
3 Measure and record the mains voltage and transformer the two waveforms are seen clearly.
secondary AC voltage VS(rms) to the rectifier in the 8 From the displayed waveforms on the screen, measure
Table-3. and record the following parameters;
4 Calculate the expected DC voltage Vdc across the load - Peak value of Source Voltage VS (Input Volt to
resistor RL using the formula, Rectifier).
Vdc=0.9VS(rms) - Frequency of Source Voltage VS.
Where, VS(rms) is the AC input to the rectifier. - Peak value of pulsating DC - Vdc.
5 Measure and record the rectifier output DC voltage Vdc - Frequency of Pulsating DC - Vdc.
across RL using multi-meter/Voltmeter.
Table 3
ting Vdc

Construct and measure the test different filter circuit used in rectifier
• explain the measure and construction of different filter circuit.
Requirements
Tools/Instruments Materials
• Trainee’s kit - 1 No • Lugboard with wired bridge rectifier
• CRO, dual trace, 20 MHz - 1 No at Ex 1.1.121 - 1 No
• Hook up wire (red, black) - as reqd.
• Resistors, 470W, 5W and 220W, 5W - 1 each.
• Electrolytic capacitor (see note) - as reqd.
PROCEDURE
1 To the constructed bridge rectifier in Ex.7.14 assuming recalculate and record the peak-to-peak ripple Vr(p-p)
a load current, IL of 80mA, calculate and record the
using the formula, Vr(p-p) <
value of filter capacitor to be connected. Assme 10%
rule for ripple. 6 Using CRO, referring Fig 2, measure and record the
2 Choose a standard value capacitor value close to the following parameters in Table 1;
calculated value of C in step 1. Get it checked and
approved by your instructor. Record the chosen
standard value capacitor.
3 Collect the capacitor and solder it on the tag board as
shown in Fig 1. Connect a DC 0-500mA as shown in
Fig 1.
- Peak value of pulsating Dc, Vout(peak)

- Peak-to-peak value of ripple Vr(peak-peak)
7 From the measured values using CRO, calculate and
record the values of Vdc and % ripple factor r using the
formula;
Vdc = Vout(peak)-
4 From the values of RL and C used calculate and record

%r = x100 where, Vr(rms) =
the theoretical value of ripple factor r, using the
formula,
8 Compare and record the difference in Vdc measured
(For full-wave rectifier) or using meter (at step-5) with the calculated value of Vdc
using Vout(peak) and Vr(p-p) (at step 7).
where, f is the supply frequency in Hz, 50Hz 9 Get the readings checked by your instructor.
C is capacitance in Farads 10 Change the value of load resistor RL from 470W to
220W, 5W and repeat steps 1 to 9.
RL is resistance in ohms
When 220W is connected as load, the load
To find% ripple factor (%r), multiply calculated
current will be approximately, 34V/220W =
r by 100.
154mA. Hence, at step 1, take 160mA as load
5 Power ON circuit. Measure and record values of Vdc current to calculate the value of C.
and IL in O&T sheet. From the measured value of IL,
34
1 Coil specifications:
(a) Core material : _____________________ (b) Gauge of wire used (SWG): _________
(c) Number of turns : _____________________ (d) Physical dimensions of the coil :
(e) Measured inductance of coil without ferrite core : _____________________m Henries.

(f) Measured inductance of coil with ferrite core : _____________________ m Henries.
2 Value and type of capacitor used :
3 Instructor’s remark on the wired LPF :

Very good Good Satisfactory Poor/Redo Continue exercise
TASK 2
1 Calculated value of 3dB cut-off frequency of the LC low-pass filter (with ferrite rod) :
Input to LPF Output voltage 3dB cut-off frequency Difference between

Frequency Volts of LPF of LPF theoretical and
(peak-peak) (peak-peak) measured 3dB cutoff
100 Hz
200 Hz
300 Hz
400 Hz
500 Hz
600 Hz
700 Hz
800 Hz
900 Hz
1000 Hz
1100 Hz
1200 Hz
1300 Hz
1400 Hz
1500 Hz
NOTE: High light or round the frequency at which output of LPF is 70.7% of maximum value.
2 Frequency response of wired LPF 3 Instructors remarks on the overall working of the
wired 1 LPF:
Fig 3
(Trainee) (Instructor)

Measure ripple voltage, ripple frequency and ripple factor of rectifier for different
load and filter capacitors
• construct and test the effect of capacitor filter with different load condition
• determine the ripple voltage, ripple frequency and ripple factor.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Lugboard/PCB - 1 No
• Oscilloscope Dual Trace 0-20 MHz - 1 No • Semiconductor diode, 1N4007 or
• Multimeter with probes - 1 No By127 - 4 Nos
• Voltmeter, 0-30V, MC - 1 No • Step-down Transformer, 12V/500mA - 1 No
• Mains cord with Three Pin Plug - 1 No
• Resistor, 5W /½W - 1 No
• Resistor, 470W/1W - 1 No
• Electrolytic Capacitor, 1000μF/25V - 2 Nos
• SPST switch/1A - 5 Nos
• Hook up wire -5m
• Patch cords - 10 Nos
PROCEDURE
1 Collect and check the required components. 6 Switch “OFF” S2 and switch “ON” S1, S3, S4, the circuit
2 Connect the components as shown in Fig 1. becomes full-wave rectifier with filter. Observe the
output voltage wave shape on CRO and plot it.
3 Energize the input to the transformer with 230V AC.
7 Measure the output voltage (Vr(p-p)) as well as DC.
4 Observe the output waveform on CRO and measure the
output with switch S1, S3 open and S2, S4 closed under 8 Calculate the Ripple factor for all the three conditions.
full-wave rectifier. 9 Get the work checked by the Instructor.
5 With switch S1, S2, S4 “ON” and S3 “OFF” the circuit
acts as capacitor input filter. Observe the output
waveform on the CRO and plot it.
36
Construct and test voltage doubler and tripler

• construct and test voltage doubler
• construct and test voltage tripler.
Requirements
Tools/equipments/ instruments Materials
• Trainees tool kit - 1 set • Lug board / PCB - 1 No
• Oscilloscope dmal trace 0-20 mhz - 1 No • Transformer 12 – 0 – 12V/ 500 MA - 1 No
• Multimeter with probes - 1 No • Semi conductor diode, 1 N 400 - 5 Nos
• Volt meter 0-30 VMC - 1 No • Capacitor 100 MF/ 25 V, 22 MF - 3 Nos
• Mainscord - 1 No
• Hookup wire - as required
• Patch cords - 10 nos
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construct and test voltage doubler
Table 1
SI.No. Input voltage in vin Output voltage in V
V0 = 2Vin
1
2
3
4
5
6
• Collect the equipments and components and check the 7
items for its good working condition. 8
• Connect them as in the circuit diagram (Fig 1). 9
• Switch ON the input supply. 10
• Measure and record the output values in table 1.
TASK 2: Construct and test voltage tripler
• Collect the equipments and components and check

the items for its good working condition
• Connect them as in the circuit diagram
• Switch ON the input supply
• Measure and record the output values in table 2.
37
Table 2
SI.No. Input voltage in vin Output voltage in V
V0 = 2Vin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Construct and test zener diode based voltage regulator circuit

• construct and test the Zener based voltage regulator circuit.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Lug Board/PCB - 1 No
• Regulated DC power Supply 0-30V/2A - 1 No • Zener Diode, 5.6V - 1 No
• Multimeter with probes - 1 No • Resistor, 470 /½W - 1 No
• Ammeter, 0-300mA MC - 1 No • Hook up wire -3m
• Voltmeter, 0-30V, MC - 2 Nos • Patch cords - 10 Nos
• Voltmeter, 0-10V, MC - 1 No
PROCEDURE
1 Collect the equipments and components and check the 3 Switch ON the input supply.
items for its good working condition.
4 Measure and record the values of VR, VZ and IZ in the
2 Connect them as in the circuit diagram-1. Table-1.
5 After observing readings, switch “OFF” PSU and from
the recorded readings, calculate the Zener resistance
RZ and power dissipated PZ for each set of readings.
Do not dismantle the circuit board as this is to
be utilized for exercise No.1.8.73
Table 1
Calculated
Sl. Unregulated Voltage Drop Zener Zener Zener Zener
No. Input voltage, across series voltage current, Resistance, Power,
Vin Resistor VR VZ IZ RZ PZ
Formula:
• Zener Resistance =
• Zener Power = PZ = VZ.IZ
39
Electronics & Hardware Exercise 2.1.166&167
Construct and test zener based shunt regulator & zener based series regulator
• construct and test zener based shunt regulator
• construct and test zener transistor based series regulator.
Requirements
Tools/equipments/instruments Materials
• Trainees tool kit - 1 set • Lug board / PCB - 2 Nos
• Regulated power supply (0-20) v/ 2A - 1 No • Zener diode 5.6 v - 2 Nos
• Multimeter with probes - 1 No • Resistor 470&! / 1/2w - 3 Nos
• Volt meter (0-30) VMC - 1 No • Hookup wire - 3m
• Patch cords - 10 nos
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construct and test zener based shunk regulator
• Collect the equipment and components and check
the item for its good condition
• Connect them as in the circuit diagram Fig 1
• Switch ON the input supply
• Measure and record the output values Vin, VZ, VR, IZ,
IL & VO in table 1.
• Switch off the PSU
• Get the work checked by the instructor
• Transistor
Table 1
Sl.No Unregulated Voltage drop across Zener Load current IL Regulated output
input voltage Vin series resistor VR voltage VZ voltage VO
TASK 2: Construct and test a simple series regular circuit

1 Refer data book and record the required details of the
given transistor(SL 100 or equivalent) in Table 1 of
record Sheet.
2 Test to confirm good working condition of the given
transistor and other circuit components.
3 Solder the components on the given Tag board as per
the schematic diagram and layout shown in Fig 1 and
2 respectively. Get the wired circuit checked by your
instructor.
Note that the tag board is already wired with bridge
rectifier with filter in earlier exercises.
40
4 Connect an unregulated dc voltage of 17V to the input ripple voltage at the input and output of the regulator.
termi-nals of the wired series regulator board.
10 Switch off mains supply. Replace the 220 W load
5 Get the interconnections made checked by your resistor RL by a 180 W resistor.
instructor.
With RL = 180W, the load current will increase
6 Switch-on the ac mains supply to the unregulated dc from the earlier 55mA to 66mA. This results in a
supply. total load of 10.3mA through LED, plus, 66mA
through RL (10.3mA + 66mA = 76.3mA). By doing
7 Measure and record the input voltage and output
this, you are still in safe loading the regulator
voltage of the series regulator.
because the regulator was designed for a load of
8 Measure and record the following voltage levels in <100mA. (Refer lesson 1.3.17 step 3, note)
record Sheet.
Do not use RL of value lower than 180W, this
a) Voltage across zener, VZ will load the regu-lator beyond is designed load
b) VCE of the transistor Q1 current which will damage the pass transistor.
c) VBE of the transistor Q1. 11 With increased load current, repeat steps 7, 8 and 9.
9 Using a CRO, measure and record the peak - peak 12 Get your work and recorded readings checked by your
instructor.
TASK 2: Construct and test series regular with voltage feedback

1 Collect the components required to carry out task 2.
Test to confirm good working condition of the
components. Identify and put sleeves to the transistor
leads.
2 Test the ouput of the unregulated power supply to
confirm its good working condition.
The expected unregulated power supply
output voltage is 17 to 18V.
3 Referring to the schematic and layout diagram of the
series regulator with voltage-feedback shown in Fig 3
and Fig 4 respectively, modify the wired simple series
regulator circuit wired in task 1.
4 Get the modified circuit checked by your instructor.
7 Using a CRO, measure and record the peak-to-peak
5 Connect the output of unregulated dc power supply to
ripple voltage at the input and the output of the wired
the input of the wired regulator circuit board.
regulator.
6 Measure and record the unregulated DC input voltage,
8 Measure and record the following voltage levels in
and the regulated dc output voltage.
record sheet.
Electronics & Hardware: Instrument Mechanic (NSQF Level - 5) - Exercise 2.1.166&167 41

i) VZ 10 With increased load (RL = 180W), repeat steps 6, 7
and 8.
ii) VF
11 From the recorded readings in record sheet, calculate
iii) VCQ1
and record,
iv) VCEQ2
i) Percentage load regulation
9 Switch-off mains supply. Connect a 180W resistor in
ii) Ripple rejection ratio
place of the existing 220W load resistor RL.
To get V out(No load), temporarily open R L and
This reduced RL increases the load current to
measure. Measure Vout(full load) with RL as 180W.
67mA. Hence the total current through the
pass transistor will be a 6.5mA of Id + 10.3mA 12 Get your work checked by your instructor.
of ILED + 67mA of IL.
Do not use a resistor of less than 180W as RL.
42 Electronics & Hardware: Instrument Mechanic (NSQF Level - 5) - Exercise 2.1.166&167

Construct and test a +12V fixed voltage regulator using 3 terminal regulator IC
• construct and test a +12V regulator using IC 7812.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Suitable heat sink for IC 7812 - 1 No
• DC Regulated power supply • Capacitor 270 nF, disc/25V - 1 No
0-30 V/2A - 1 No • 10 mF/25 V, electrolytic - 1 No
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Red LED/5mm - 1 No
• DC ammeter, 0-1A - 1 No • Resistor 820W, ¼W CR25 - 1 No
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No • Hook up wires (red and black colour) - 1 cm each
• Rheostat 100W/1A - 1 No • Wire sleeves (R,Y,G) - 2 cm each
• Rosin cored solder - 10 gm
Materials
• Breadboard - 1 No
• Three-pin voltage regulator
IC 7812 or equivalent - 1 No
PROCEDURE
1 From the type code marked on the given 3 pin
regulator IC. Identify the terminals of IC 7812.
2 Insert sleeves to the termi-nals using colour coding
scheme given below;
Input - Yellow/Orange sleeve.
Common - Green/Black sleeve.
Output - Red sleeve.
3 Get the work done in steps 1 and 2 checked by the
instructor.
4 Fix the suitable aluminium heat sink for IC 7812 on the
bread board Refer Fig 2 for the position of heat sink on
the breadboard.
5 Construct the voltage regulator circuit referring to the
schematic and layout diagram shown in Fig 1 & Fig 2.
The unregulated dc voltage to the regulator
should not be more than 24 volts; otherwise
the IC may get damaged.
8 Using loading rheostat, load the regulator in steps of
200 mA upto 800mA and at each step measure and
record,
- Regulated dc output voltage
- Input and output ripple.
Loading is limited to 80% of its rated maximum
6 Get the neatness and correctness of your wiring of 1A. This is because the heat sink used with
checked by your instructor. IC 7812 may not be very effective in transferring
away the heat.
7 Apply 16 to 20 volts unregulated dc voltage to the input
9 From the recorded readings, calculate the
of the wired 12V regulator. Record the unregulated
input voltage and no-load output voltage of the regulator – output voltage regulation at each step of loading.
in O & T sheet.
43
– ripple rejection at each step of loading. 10 Get the work checked by the Instructor.
O & T Sheet
1 Neatness and correctness of wiring: Very good Good Satisfactory Poor Continue Exercise
2 Level of unregulated input voltage to the regulator : ____________
Load - Current
No-load 200 mA 400 mA 600 mA 800 mA
Output voltage
Input ripple (P-P)
Output ripple
Ripple rejection
Output regulation

Construct and test fixed +15V and -15V Voltage regulator unit ICs
• construct and test a +fixed 15 volts regulator using a 7815 three-pin regulator
• construct and test a fixed 15 volts regulator using 7915 three pin regulator.
Requirements
• Heat sink for 7812, 7915 - 1 No.
• Trainees kit (use suitable heat sink )
• Rheostat 100W, 50W - 1 No./batch. • Zener diode 6.1 V, 1/4 W - 1 No.
• CRO, 20MHz - 1 No./batch. • Capacitor 270nf, disc, μf - 1 each.
• DC ammeter, 0-1A - 1 No./batch. • 10μf, 25 V, electrolytic - 1 No.
• 12V power supply - 1 No. • Preset/Potentiometer, 470W - 1 No.
• Red LED - 1 No.
Materials
• Resistor 820W, 1/4 W and 1KW, 1/4W - 1 each.
Component list for Tag board power supply • Hook up wires (red and black colour) - 1 Mtr.
• Tag board Code No. - 1 No. • Rosin cored solder -10 cms
• Three-pin voltage regulator • Wire sleeve (R,Y,G) each - 2 cm
μA7812 or equivalent, A7915 - 1 No. • Resistors
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construct and test a fixed + 15V regulator using 7815 Three pin regulators
1 From the type code marked on the given 3 pin regulator
IC, identify and record the IC’s specifications in
record sheet.
2 Identify the terminals of 7815 and put sleeves to the
termi-nals using colour coding scheme given below;
Input - Yellow/Orange sleeve.
Common - Green/Black sleeve.
Output - Red sleeve.
3 Get the work done in steps 1 and 2 checked by your
instructor.
4 Fix the heat sink on IC 7815 as demonstrated by your
instructor. Refer Fig 2 for the position of heat sink on
the tag board.
schematic and layout diagram shown in Fig 1 and
Fig 2. 6 Get the neatness and correctness of your wiring
checked by your instructor.
7 Apply 16 to 20 volts unregulated dc voltage to the input
of the wired 15V regulator. Record the unregulated
input voltage and no-load output voltage of the regulator
in record sheet.
The unregulated dc voltage to the regulator
should not be more than 24 volts; otherwise
the IC may get damaged.
The unregulated dc voltage to the regulator should be
atleast 20 volts, otherwise the regulator may not work
satisfactorily.
45
8 Using loading rheostat, load the regulator in steps of 9 From the recorded readings, calculate the
200 mA upto 800mA and at each step measure and
– output voltage regulation at each step of loading.
record,
– ripple rejection at each step of loading.
– Regulated dc output voltage
– Input and output ripple.
Loading is limited to 80% of its rated maximum of
1A. This is because the heat sink used with 7812
may not be very effective in taking away the heat.
1 IC specifications from marke code
Type code Manufacturer Type of regulator Output voltage Rated max. load Package type
positive/Negative current
Load - Current
Output voltage
Input ripple (P-P)
Output ripple
Ripple rejection
Output regulation
TASK 2: Construct and test a fixed -15 volts regulator using a 7915 three pin regulator
1 Identify the terminals of 7915 and put sleeves to the
terminal using colour coding scheme given below.
Input – yellow/ orange sleeve
Common – green / black sleeve
Output – Red sleeve
schematic lay out diagram shown in Fig 3.
3 Get the neatness and correctness of your wiring
checked by your instructor.
4 Apply 16 to 18V unregulated dc voltage to the input
of the wired -15v regulator. Record the unregulated
input voltage and no load output voltage of the
regulator in record sheet.

1 IC specifications from marke code
Type code Manufacturer Type of regulator Output voltage Rated max. load Package type
positive/Negative current
Load - Current
Output voltage
Input ripple (P-P)
Output ripple
Ripple rejection
Output regulation

Construct and test a 1.2V to 30V variable output regulated power supply using
IC LM317T and its characteristics
• construct and test a 1.2 V to 30 V variable output regu-lated power supply.
• plot its characteristics.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments 10 μF/50V, electrolytic - 1 No
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set 100 nF, ceramic disc - 1 No
• Soldering Iron 25W/230V - 1 No • LED, Red, 5mm - 1 No
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No • Resistors
• Rheostat 100 /1A - 1 No 4K7, potentiometer, carbon, rotary - 1 No
2K2, carbon, ½W - 1 No
Materials
220 , carbon, ¼W - 1 No
• Breadboard/PCB - 1 No • 3-terminal voltage regulator, LM317T,
• Step down transformer, 240V/24V or TO-220 - 1 No each
12-0-12/24V - 1 No • 1A, slow blow fuse with fuse holder - 1 No.
• Diodes, 1N4002 or BY127 or Eqv - 6 Nos • Hook up wires - as reqd
• Capacitors 2200 μF/50V • Rosin cored solder - 20 gm
electrolytic - 1 No • Heat sink for TO-220 package - 1 No
25 μF/50V, electrolytic - 1 No
PROCEDURE
1 Test all the components to confirm their good working All components except the transformer to be
condi-tion. Record the specifications of IC LM317T in mounted on bread board. Use suitable
O&T sheet, refer with semi conductor data manual. heatsink with IC 317 T.
2 Check the given bread board. 5 Get the correctness and neatness of wiring checked
3 Construct a variable regulated output power supply on by the instructor.
the given bread board referring to the schematic 6 Diagram connect the secondary of (230/24V)
shown in Fig 1. transformer to the assembled circuit. Switch ON mains
supply.
Switch OFF main supply immediately if burning,

instructor. Check the IC and ensure that it is
smoking overheating, sparks are observed in
not heated-up
any of the components, and report to the
48
7 Measure and record the unregulated dc input and the 11 Get the readings checked by the instructor.
minimum, maximum variable voltage of the regulator
under no-load condi-tion. Lab Assignment: Mount the regulator IC on a
good aluminium heat-sink (available in market).
8 Set the output to +15 volts and load the output using a If a good heat-sink is used with the IC, you can
loading rheostat in steps of 200 mA up to 600 mA. In draw upto 1Amps easily. Mount the transformer
each step measure and record the output voltage and and the wired PCB in a metallic box of suitable
the ripple voltages. size. Mount the POT on the front panel of the
Load current is restricted to 600mA as heat- box made. Mount output terminal sockets (Red
sink is provid-ed to the IC may not be the ideal and black) on the front panel of the box from
one. which DC volt-age can be taken. This will serve
you as a 1.2V to 30V, 1A rating variable power
9 Calculate and record the output regulation and ripple supply for servicing circuits in forthcoming
rejection of the regulator. exercises as well for the hobby gadgets and
10 Using a dc current meter (0-1A range) short the load general servicing.
termi-nals momentarily and record the short circuit fold 12 Plot the VI characteristics using readings.
back protec-tion current level.
Table 1
Type Package Output voltage Max. output
number type current
Min. Max.
1 Specification of the given 3-terminal regulator IC.

3 Unregulated dc input to regulator : ____________________

Minimum adjustable output voltage (No-load) : ____________________
Maximum adjustable output voltage (No-load) : ____________________
4 Set output voltage : 15 volts
Load current 200mA 300mA 400mA 500mA 600mA

Output voltage
Output ripple (p-p)
Input ripple
Output regulation

Identify the components/devices of SMPS and draw their corresponding symbols

• dismantle the SMPS unit from CPU cabinet and identify major section/ components of SMPS unit
• draw the symbols of observed components of SMPS unit.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instuments • Chart showing all types of connectors
• ESD wrist band - 1 No. used in SMPS of PC - 1 No.
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set. Materials
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No.
• Aids: Block diagram of SMPS - 1 No. • SMPS unit used in personal computer - 1 No.
Safety precaution
1 Ensure the power cord is removed from the
CPU.
2 Before opening CPU cabinet, touch the
cabinet outer cover by wearing wrist band
to discharge ESP.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Dismantling the SMPS unit from CPU cabinet and identification of sections
1 Open the computer cabinet cover, by removing the
door screws as shown in Fig 1. Fig 2
Fig 1
5 Record the name of the connector, type and number

of pins in Table-1.
6 Remove/Unplug the connectors from HDD, DVD, FAN
2 Identify the location of wires with colour codes and mother board carefully.
comming out of SMPS unit as shown in Fig 2. 7 Unscrew the fixing screws and remove the SMPS unit
3 Notedown the connections of SMPS going to various from the CPU cabinet and open it as shown in Fig 3.
sections of mother board and other devices inside 8 Draw the layout of the assembly and mark the major
the CPU, put tags with label for each connector. sections/components/devices.
4 Draw the layout of mother board and mark the
sections/ location of connectors with label number in
it.
50
Keep the fixing screws seperately for Fig 3
assembling the SMPS after completion of this
exercise.
Table - 1
SI.No. Name of the No. of wires Type of connector Connected to which Remark
connector section/device
9 Get the work checked by the instructor.
TASK 2: Identification of type of connectors in SMPS unit
Note : The instructor has to label the major 3 Repeat the steps for all the labelled components/
components /devices in each section of the devices.
SMPS before issuing to trainees for this task
4 Draw the symbol of each component in the respective
1 Refer to the chart, identify the connector/sections and places in Table-2.
major components/devices in each section.
2 Record the name of the component/device in
Table - 2.
Table- 2
SI. Label No. Name of the section Name of the component Circuit symbol Remark
No.
Chart - 1
Chart showing types of connectors used in SMPS unit of personal computer system

Fig 4

List the defect and symptom in the faulty SMPS

• list the physical defects identified in the faulty SMPS (in cold condition) without switching ON
• identify sections of voltage stabilizer
• locate the major components of various sections.
Requirements
Tools / Equipments/ Instruments
Materials
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set.
• Spare components - as reqd.
• Multimeter with probes - 1 No.
• Rosincored solder - as reqd.
• Adjustable type table lamp - 1 No.
• Magnifying Lens - 1 No.
• A faulty SMPS kit - 1 No.
• Oscilloscope, 20 MHZ - 1 No.
Safety precautions
4 Do not use screw drivers to short the
1 Disconnect the SMPS unit from the mains capacitor terminals for discharging static
before remvoing from the PC. charge.
2 Do not touch the PCB with bear hand 5 Measure the voltage and make sure it is
without discharging the DC storage zero before proceeding for test.
electroytic capacitor.
3 Discharge the storage capacitor by using
an incandescent-bulb connected with wires
across the capacitor
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: List the defect in the faulty SMPS in cold condition
1 Record the specifications on the cover of SMPS. • Wire broken

2 Verify whether mains supply voltage is disconnected • PCB track cut
from the SMPS.
3 Initially perfrom cold check by keeping SMPS in OFF • Connector broken
condition (components on PCB of the defective) • Dry soldering
Observe the SMPS and list out the physical defects
• Switching transistor blown
noticed as shown below:
• Charred/smoke smell on PCB • Fuse blown.
4 Perform warm check of SMPS and measure output
• Any component like resistor, diode, black (or) voltages
charred/damage.
• Observe whether the SMPS fan is working or not.
• Capacitor top bulged (or) not.
• Observe the voltages at the connectors and various
• PCB board darkened due to short test points and record the observations in Table 1 &
Table 2.
TASK 2: Find the probable symptoms of the given faulty SMPS
1 Observe the symptoms noticed on the defective SMPS 2 Ref to the list of symptoms and remedy given in Table-
in ON condition and determine which section or 1 and prepare a list symptoms noticed in your faulty
junction could be faulty. SMPS units.
53
Probable faults and remedy
SI. Faults Cause Remedy

No.
1 SMPS dead, fuse Shorted switching transistor or Test the switching transistor
blown semiconductors, power cord or semiconductor switch. If it fails
defective, or switch , open fusible replace it.
resistor, other bad parts. Actual If the semiconductor switch is good,
cause of failure may be power check and replace the primary
surge/brownout/lightning strikes, diodes.
random failure, or primary side Replace the fusible resistor.
electrolytic capacitor (s) with greatly
reduced capacity or entirely open
2 Supply dead, fuse Bad startup circuit - open startup Test the switching transistor or
not blown resistors or open fusible resistors semiconductor switch. If it fails
due to shorted semicondutors, bed replace it.
controller components. Replace the fusible resistor
3 Supply mostly dead Bad electrolytic capacitors. Visually If any one bad capacitors are found
or takes a long time inspect for capacitors with bulging replace all electrolytic capacitors.
to come alive tops or that have leaked.
4 More ripple at the Dried up main filter capacitor(s) on Check the filter capacitor and replace
line frequency rectified AC input it
(50/60 Hz) or twice
the line frequency
(100/120 Hz)
5 No output supply Switching transistor or semiconductor Test the switching transistor or

and 300V persists in switch short and fusible resistor or semiconductor switch. If it fails
the filter capacitor starting resistor open. replace it.
after switching OFF
the supply
6 SMPS output is low If SMPS givess low voltage output Measure voltages and compare
then the fault is mostly in the error them with normal voltage given the
amplifier, and oscillator stage. Ouput circuit diagram.
loading may also affect the output Probable parts may be faulty
voltage some time zener diode in the error amp,
faulty control circuit parts, transistor,
IC, opto-coupler faulty.
7 SMPS output is high If SMPS output is high first shut Check fauult either in switch off
down set. Fault in the error amplifier, condition or by giving input supply
IC, oscillator section of SMPS. through a variac or low voltage
transformer.
Disonnect TV/computer other

sections by diconnecting base or
output transistor. Never keep on in
this fault it may danage other parts
also.
Check for - error amp circuit, zener
diode, opto-couoler, filters on error
amplifier line, transistor, IC,
oscillator. Replace the faulty
components.

SI. Faults Cause Remedy
No.
8 Combusted coil A winding coil is present on the This problem can be identified esaily
board which sometimes gets burnt by the smell or you can identify
due to excessive flow of current. through the burnt marks located on
the external section of the winding
coil. It may be possible that internal
loop is damaged.
Note: In all cases, bad solder connections are a 3 Get the work checked by the instructor.
possibility as well since there are usually large
components in these supplies and soldering to
their pins may not always be perfect. An
excessive load can also result in most of these
symptoms or may be the original cause of the
failure.

Measure/ Monitor at major test points of computer SMPS unit

• prepare the computer SMPS unit for voltage measurements
• measure/monitor voltages at various test points of the SMPS unit.
Requirements
• Computer SMPS working - 1 No. • AIDS: Chart showing various voltages
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set. of connects in smps unit of PC
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No. • Computer power cord - 1 No.
• Hook-up wire - as reqd.
Safety precatutions
Make sure you conduct this test on a table with yourself standing a rubber that any insulated material
to avoid static electricity destroying the computer components
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Preparation of computer SMPS unit for voltage measurements
1 Remove the SMPS from the computer cabinet by 4 Connect the power cord to the SMPS unit and switch
follow the procedure. ON power.
2 Identify the green colour wire (power good signal test 5 Observe the fan is running to confirm the working of
point) from the bunch of wires on the 24 pin molex SMPS unit.
connector as shown in Fig 1.
6 Remove the hook up wire and re-insert if the fan is
3 Use a piece of hookup wire, bend it as ‘U’ shape, not rotating.
connect it across the green and black wire terminals
as shown in Fig 2. 7 Get the work checked by the instructor.
Fig 1 Fig 2
56
TASK 2: Measurement/monitoring voltages at various test points.
1 Start measurement of AC voltage across the three
terminal mains cord and record the readings in
Table-1.
Table-1
SI. Parameter to measure Voltage (AC) Remarks
No.
1 Phase to Neutral --------------------
2 Phase to Earth --------------------
3 Neutral to Earth --------------------
2 Switch OFF supply and plug the mains cord into SMPS 3 Switch ON SMPS supply and measure the DC voltage
unit, and select the P-4 power cable connector used across the P-4 cable connector and record the
for CPU cooler fan. readings in Table-2.
Table -2
SI. No. Description Wire colour Measured voltage
1 Ground Black
2 Ground Black
3 +12 VDC Yellow
4 +12 VDC Yellow
4 Refer to the chart showing voltages at various test

points on power cable connector and record the
observations in Table-3.
Table-3
SI. No. Wire colour Description Measured voltage Remarks
3
.
.
.
.
24
5 Refer to the chart details and measure test point voltage

at the 4 pin molex peripheral connector and record
observation in Table-4.
Table-4
SI. No. Wire colour Description Measured voltage Remarks
1 Yellow
2 Black
3 Black
4 Red
Note: The instructor has to guide the trainees preparation of suitable tables to record
to measure voltage at additional connectors measurements according to the SMPS model
for SATA, Aux power connector etc. with available in the section.
Chart showing voltages at various connectors of SMPS units of personal computer system Fig 3
PIN DESCRIPTION OF THE 24-PIN POWER CABLE CONNECTOR
Pin Name Colour Description/voltage level Measured
voltage
1 3.3V Orange +3.3 VDC
3 COM Black Ground
4 5V Red +5 VDC
5 COM Black Ground
6 5V Red +5 VDC
7 COM Black Ground
8 PWR_OK Grey Power Ok is a status signal Fig 3
generated by the power supply

ON, disconnect from
GND to switch OFF.
9 5VSB Purple +5 VDC Standby voltage

(max 10mA)
10 12V Yellow +12 VDC
11 12V Yellow +12 VDC
14 -12V Blue -12 VDC
15 COM Black Ground
16 PS_ON Green Power supply on (active low),

short this pin to GND to
switch power supply ON,
disconnect from GND to
switch OFF.
17 COM Black Ground
18 COM Black Ground
19 COM Black Ground
20 -5 V White Ground
21 +5V Red +5 VDC
22 +5V Red +5 VDC
23 +5V Red +5 VDC
24 COM Black Ground

PIN description of the P-4 power cable connector
Pin Name Colour Description/Voltage Measured
Level Voltage
1 GND Black Ground Fig 4
2 GND Black Ground

3 12V DC Yellow +12 VDC
4 12V DC Yellow +12 VDC
PIN description of the 4-PIN molex peripheral connector
Pin Name Colour Description/Voltage Measured
Level Voltage
1 12V DC Yellow +12 VDC Fig 5
2 GND Black Ground

3 GND Black Ground
4 +5V Red +5 VDC
Ac input voltage measurement (at the mains socket)
Table - 5
SI. No Parameters to measure Voltage (AC) Remarks
1 Phase to neutral voltage
2 Phase to earth
3 Neutral to earth
Pin Pin Description Fig 6

Number Name
1 +5V
2 GND
3 +5V
4 GND
5 PG +5V When power
good
6 +5V STB Stand-by power
7 +12V
Fig 7
8 -12V
9 GND
10 GND
11 PWR_ON Connect to ground
to power on
12 GND
13 GND
14 GND
15 -5V
16 +5V Another type of 20 Pin power connector used in new
PCs.
17 +5V
Cable colors may differ between power supplies.
18 +5V
TFSC mainboard puts 0.7-1.4V there to control voltage
19 TFSC Thermal Fan
supplied to power supply’s fan
speed control.
20 +5V (Fan voltage increases when TFSC increases).

Troubleshoot the fault in SMPS unit, rectify defect and verify output with load
• discharge the filter capacitor of SMPS unit
• identify the physical faulty component and replace it and test the output with load.
Requirements
• ESD work bench - 1 No. • 100 watt/230V bulb with holder - 1 No.
• Safety gloves - 1 No. • Wire wound resistor
• Trainees tool kit - 1 set. (1.8kW or 2.2kW/10W) - 1 No.
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 set.
• LCR Meter - 1 No.
Safety precaution 3 Please note that some connections of the

1 Keep the place dry and clean SMPS connectors contain a clip attached
to it. Make sure to remove the clips before
2 Make sure you conduct this test test on a removing the connection.
table with yourself standing on a rubber
mat or any insulated material to avoid static
electricity destroying the computer
peripherals.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Discharging the filter capacitor

A. Discharge using bulb method 3 Connect 100 watt bulb wire across the leads of the
Make sure the power cord is removed from the capacitor as shown in Fig 1 & 2. Filter capacitors will
SMPS to avoid Electrical shock. be discharged.
1 Dismantle the SMPS by referring to the procedure Fig 2
given in the previous exercises.
2 Connect 100 watt bulb wire across the leads of the
capacitor as shown in Fig 1 & 2. Filter capacitors will
be discharged.
Fig 1
60
B. Discharge using reistor Method Fig 3
1 Take a High wattage Low ohms wire wound resistor with
proper insulated lead.
2 Use the resistor lead to short the capacitor to discharge
as shown in Fig 3.
3 Use either a 1.8 K or a 2.2 K ohm 5 to 10 watt resistor
to discharge the high voltage capacitor.
TASK 2 : Identification of the physical fault (fuse blown) in SMPS

1 Take the dismantled SMPS as shown in Fig 4.
Fig 6
Fig 4
5 Look the fuse wire if there is a visible gap in the wire as

shown in Fig 7.
Fig 7
2 The board from the SMPS cabinet is similar to as shown

in Fig 5.
Fig 5
6 Look the fuse carefully any dark or metallic smear

inside the glass as shown in Fig 8.
7 If any above faults found in the fuse then the fuse is
blown and needs to be replaced.
Fig 8
3 Disconnect the SMPS and make sure all electrolytic

capacitors are discharged.
4 Remove the fuse from its holder as shown in Fig 6.

8 If there is no physical fault observed in fuse then use 11 If the meter shows continuity, as shown in Fig 9(a) then
multimeter to check it. the fuse is good.
9 Set a multimeter (Fig 9) to the continuity setting. 12 If the multimeter reading is OL(Over Limit) as shown in
Fig 9(b), then the fuse is blown. If the fuse is blown,
10 Place one of the multimeter leads on one end of the fuse.
replace the fuse with one that is exactly having the same
Place the other lead on the other end of the fuse as
current rating.
shown in the Fig 9.
13 Record the observations in TABLE 1.
Table 1
Observed Condition
TASK 3 : Identification of the short circuit fault using bulb

1 Connect the 100W bulb across the fuse holder as a) Immediately switch off the AC main.
shown in Fig 10.
b) Discharge the big filter capacitor as given in TASK 1.
Fig 10
5 Record the observation in the TABLE 2.
Table 2
Observed bulb status SMPS status
2 Power ON the SMPS unit.

3 The bulb will be initially glowing bright then for a good
SMPS bulb glowing turns off, SMPS is in good / working B Identification the fault in short circuited components
condition. using Resistance method
4 The light bulb will glow bright even after you have waited 3 Set the DMM to resistance unit.
for couple of minutes as shown in Fig 11, then it
4 Keep the red probe to the cold ground and black probe
indicates there is problem in the SMPS.
to each of the secondary diode as shown in Fig 12.
Fig 11 Fig 12

Fig 13 c) The light bulb glows intermittently this could indicate
components failure in the power supply like bad
filter capacitor ,current sense resistor higher ohm,
etc. (value would have been increased)
d) The light bulb become extra bright and all the output
voltages have increased .this indicates the problem
is in the regulation circuit like an open resistor in
feedback circuit , bad opto isolator IC faulty TLC431
IC, etc.
e) The light bulb keeps cycling ( continuously ON and
OFF). This could indicate problem in the SMPS
area and it can also mean the OPTO IC is sending
an Error signal to the primary circuit of power supply
through opto isolator IC causing the power supply
to cycle.
5 Record the observation in the TABLE 3.
i) If any one of the component shows same resistance
Table 3
reading (low readout) on both polarity, then suspect
that there is a problem in that component.
Sl. No. Probable defect Tick
ii) If the multimeter shows different values on both
polarities then the component is good.
C Isolation method
1 Identify the B+ line of the Back/Boost sections and
break/disconnect the B+ line from the circuit as shown
in Fig 14.
Fig 14
Fig 15
Fig 16
2 Connect the 100 W bulb between the B+ line to cold

ground.
3 Power ON and verify the bulb glowing condition.
4 There are five possibilities that can be expected from
the light bulb.
a) The light bulb lit with a constant brightness and all
of the output voltage measured normal at the
secondary side this indicates the SMPS is working
fine and the cause of the power problem in the load
side. It maybe fly back transformer, yoke coils etc.
b) No light from the light bulb and no voltage measured
at the output of the power supply, this indicates the
problem is in the SMPS.

TASK 4: Identification of the short circuited components
Capacitor checking
Fig 18
1 Disconnect the power card.
2 Discharge the main(large) capacitor.
Fig 17
Table 4
Measured output voltage
3 Test the healthyness of diodes and capacitors at Without capacitor With capacitor
secondary section using multimeter.
4 Open the lead of capacitor and measure capacitance
using LCR meter.
5 Apply the supply to board and check the output voltage
with out capacitor.
6 If the output voltage is less (or) no output measured,
then fault may be in capacitor.
7 Switch OFF the supply and replace the capacitor.
Note: To confirm fault with switching transistor
Fig 19 check the charge voltage across big filter
capacitor in the input section. (after switching
OFF the SMPS).
a) If the capacitor shows voltage considerabily
then the fault could be in the switching
transistor.
b) If the capacitor shows No voltage then the
fault could be in some other components/
section.
8 Switch ON the supply and check the output voltage.

9 Record the observation in TABLE 4.
TASK 5 : Connection of SMPS the circuit for performing load test

1 Connect the circuit as shown in Fig 20 across 5V
terminals.
2 Keep the rheostat in max resistance position.
3 Power ON the circuit.
4 Increase the current in steps of 200mA, note down the
corresponding voltage and tabulate the reading in the
TABLE 5.

5 Observe that even when the current is varied by the Table 5
load, the output of SMPS remains constant at the rated
voltage. Sl.No. Load current(mA) Voltage(V)

Identify front panel controls & indicators of UPS

• identify front panel indicators of UPS
• identify different sockets and connectors on the rear panel on the rear panel of UPS.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set. • Cotton waste - as reqd.
• Single phase UPS, 6KVA
with manual - 1 No.
Safety precaution
1 Keep the place dry and clean
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Identification of different controls and indicators on front panel of UPS

1 Note down and record the specifications of the UPS. Table - 1
2 Draw the sketch of front panel of the UPS with all
indicators and switches SI.No. Name of the Purpose
indicator/control
3 Identify each indicator and control on the front panel
by referring to Fig.1/ Operating manual. 1
4 Record the observations in Table-1 2
5 Repeat the above steps for all indicators and controls 3
on the front panel and record them.
4
6 Referring to the manual, record a brief function of
the switches and the indicators. 5
66
TASK 2: Identification of different sockets and connectors on the rear panel of UPS
1 Turn the rear panel of the UPS and identify the name
of unit, record its socket and connector available in Table - 2
rear panel with the help of operation/Instruction
manual. SI.No. Name of the Purpose
Sockets/Connectors
2 Find out each socket in the UPS, note down in the
Table-2.
3 Repeat the above steps for all sockets and connectors
and note down in Table-2.

Identify UPS transformer and various circuit board

Objectives : At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• identify the major section in computer UPS
• identify the components used in computer UPS.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/ Instruments Material
• Computer UPS(650 VA) - 1 set • Nil
• Trainees tool kit - 1 set.
Note: The instructor has to label the major components/parts and sections of the UPS
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Identification of major sections in computer UPS

1 Disconnect the power cable from the mains supply.
Remove the screws that are present in the side panel Fig 2
and open the UPS unit as demonstrated by the instructor
as shown in Fig 1.
Fig 1
Table 1
Sl.No. Major section in UPS
2 Unscrew the battery clamp pull out/ remove the battery 2

terminal connectors and take out the battery.
4
Before opening CPU case touch cabinet outer
cover to discharge ESD power. 5
3 Note down the wirings and carefully lift the circuit board.
Remove from its position. 6
4 Find out the major section in UPS as shown in Fig 2. 5 Get the work checked by the instructor.
Note down your observations in TABLE 1.
TASK 2 : Identification of components used in computer UPS

1 Remove the circuit board(PCB) from the UPS cabinet. 3 Repeat steps for all the other major components.
2 Identify the listed components in the circuit board as
shown in Fig 3. Record the label of the identified
components in TABLE 2 by referring to related theory
68
Fig 3
Table 2
Sl.No. Name of sections Components/Parts/Devices Remarks
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Perform load test to measure backup time

• perform load test of battery using UPS
• measure the back-up time of the UPS with battery.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set. • 100W/240V incandescent
• Computer UPS lamp (Test lamp) - 1 No.
(around 600VA) with operating • 12V/7AH, maintenance
instruction manual - 1 No. free rechargeable battery - 1 No.
• DMM with probes - 1 Set.
• Voltmeter 0-30VDC - 1 No.
• Safety gloves - 1 Pair.
• Stop watch - 1 No.
Safety precaution
2 Ensure that the UPS is kept in switched
1 Before connecting the battery to UPS, in OFF condition
spect the electrode terminals for symbols/
colour codes on the battery. 3 Connect the leads with correct polarity and
tighten them.
PROCEDURE
1 Use Dc voltmeter measure the terminal voltage and 6 Reset the stop watch at starting point.
verify with the specification on the battery.
7 Start the stop watch and switch ON the UPS
2 Take out the terminals of the battery cable from the simulataneously, with voltmeter probes kept across the
UPS. battery terminals.
3 Observe the colour code of the cables and tightly 8 Observe the readings on the meter and terminals
connect the battery with correct polarity. record in Table-1.
4 Connect the DC voltmeter across the battery, measure 9 Observe the lamp glow with beep sound carefully and
the voltage and record the observation in Table-1 as no stop the clock immediately when the lamp goes off.
load voltage.
10 Note down the readings on the voltmeter and stop watch
5 Connect the lamp load to the UPS output as shown in in Table-1.
Fig 1.
Table - 1
Status of UPS Battery voltage Full load
No load Light load
UPS OFF
UPS ON
70

Install and test an inverter

• connect the external battery to inverter unit
• test the inverter by connecting to mains power.
Requirements
Tools / Equipments/ Instruments Materials

• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • 240V/16A, SPST switch - 2 Nos.
• Digital Multimeter with probes - 1 No. • 240V/16A, 3Pin scoket - 2 Nos.
• Line tester - 1 No. • Connecting wires - as reqd.
• Hand gloves - 1 Set. • 100W/240V Test lamp - 1 No.
• Double ended spanner - as reqd.
• Inverter - 1 No.
• Battery, 12V, 150AH - 1 No.
Safety precaution • Sparking may occur during connection of

• Do not make contact with both the battery battery cables to battery terminals.
terminals simultaneously with metal parts • Use only the battery cables provided with
like screw driver, spanners and bare hand the inverter unit to connect the external
battery.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Connection of the external battery to the inverter unit

1 Read the user manual of the given inverter unit and 3 Select the ref colour cable and terminals of the
check the capacity of battery given for inverter. battery to the +Ve terminals of the UPS
2 Identify the colour code used for the battery cables using bolt & nuts as shown in Fig 1.
and polarity marked on the terminals of the battery. 4 Take the black colour cable from the UPS, connect it
to the battery using bolt & nut as shown in Fig.
72
5 Use double ended spanners, tighten the bolt & nuts 6 Get the connections checked by the Instructor.
with correct force.
TASK 2: Testing the inverter by connecting to mains power and load

1 Measure the voltage across the battery terminals, 4 Connect the test lamp across the output terminals,
record the readings in Table-1. switch ON the UPS and observe the lamp is glowing.
Note: Take care while handling 230V AC mains 5 Measure the AC voltage across the output of UPS,
voltage. the DC voltage across the battery and record the
Ensure that the inverter start/Run switch is readings in Table.
in OFF condition before doing output 6 Switch OFF AC mains and measure output voltage
connection. battery voltage and record the readings in Table - 1
2 Connect the AC mains supply to the inverter unit
through 16A, switch & socket by referring Fig.1
3 Connect the power cord of the inverter to the AC
mains supply, switch ON and measure the DC volt-
age across battery terminals; record the readings in
Table-1.
Table-1
AC input supply AC output supply Battery voltage
P-N P-E N-E P-N P-E N-E UPS OFF UPS OFF Load ON Load ON
AC OFF AC ON AC ON AC OFF
7 Get the work checked by the Instructor and Switch

OFF the UPS.

Troubleshoot the fault in inverter unit, rectify defects and verify the output
with load
• identify the faulty components/section in the inverter
• rectify the defects in the inverter unit
• verify the output with load.
Requirements
Tools / Equipments/ Instruments Materials
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Defective inverter with battery - 1 No.
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No. • Test lamp with 230V, 100W bulb - 1 No.
• Line tester - 1 No. • Sketch pen - 1 No.
• Magnifying glass - 1 No.
• Oscilloscope, 100MHz - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Identification of the faulty components/section in the inverter
1 Open the inverter cover and carry out the visual 5 Mark the different test points by using sketch pen.
inspection of the board and connectors with the help
6 Apply supply to the inverter unit and measure voltage
of magnifying glass.
at marked test points.
2 Identify if any damaged components or connectors
7 Observe the waveforms using CRO at switching device
are seen.
input/ouput
3 Remove the damaged component and check the
8 Record the measured readings in the table-1
condition
4 Trace the circuit by referring the circuit diagram
(Fig.1) and identify the sections
Table - 1
Section Test point Description Voltage
Battery TP1 Battery voltage
Inverter TP2 Inverter feedback voltage from inverter output transformer

TP3 Rectified feedback DC voltage
PWM TP3 Sensed DC Voltage to PWM section

section TP5 Trigger pulse from PWM IC to upper switching device (AC)
TP7 Output AC waveform of upper switching device (AC)

Switching TP8 Output AC waveform of lower switching device (AC)
section
Inverter TP9 Inverter output voltage (also observe output waveform)

output
TASK 2: Rectification of the defects in the inverter unit

1 Based on the observed readings obtained from the 2 Remove the suspected component from PCB and test
marked test points and waveforms, identify the faulty it.
section/component in the inverter.
74
3 Replace the defective components.
TASK 3: Verification of the output terminal with lamp load

1 Connect a 240V, 100W lamp load at the output 3 Measure the output AC voltage and confirm that it
terminal remains constant.
2 Switch ON the inverter, observe the lamp light 4 Get the work checked by the instructor.

Construct and test thyristor based devies

• construct and test over voltage protection circuit for main AC
• check SCR, DIAC and TRIAC.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • General purpose PCB - 1 No.
• Trainees kit - 1 No. • Two point terminal strips for mains - 2 Nos.
• Variable DC PSU 0-10V,1A - 1 No. • Flexible wire,5A,240V
each (Red and Black) - 2 mts
Materials • Semiconductors
• General purpose PCB - 1 No. SCRs of 400 volts rating - 2 Nos.
• Semiconductors Diodes, 1N4007 - 4 Nos.
SCR of 50 volts rating - 1 No. Zener, 120V/1W - 1 No.
Transistor 2N 3702 or equivalent - 1 No. • Resistors 22K, 3W - 1 No.
Zener, 4V7, 400mW - 1 No. (or 2 Nos. of 47K, 2W in parallel)
LED, Red colour 5mm - 1 No. • 240V, 3Watts lamp - 1 No.
LED, Green colour 5mm - 1 No. • DIACD3202 - 1 No.
• Resistors • TRIAC BTT36 - 2 Nos.
100 Ohms, 2W - 1 No.
4K7,¼W - 1 No.
1K,¼W - 1 No.
220 Ohms,¼W - 1 No.
For satisfactory performance of circuit given in Fig 2, it is advised to use SCRs whose gate current (min)
is 6mA.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Wire and test a over voltage protection circuit for main AC supply.
1 Wire the circuit shown in Fig 1 on a general purpose 2 Connect a lamp load to the wired circuit.
tag/lug board. Without connecting the mains supply
and the load. get the wired circuit checked by your You may use the mains lamp tester itself as a load.
instructor. 3 Keep AC mains ON/OFF switch to OFF. Connect the
Since 240V mains supply will be on the wired output of variac to the wired circuit input and AC mains
circuit, use insulated multistrand wire for circuit to input of variac.
interconnections. Make sure there is sufficient 4 Set the output control knob on variac to 200 Volts
(5cms) gap between the soldered live and neutral without switching on the mains AC.
wires coming from mains and going to the load.
For safe working you are advised to mount the 5 Switch-ON mains. Measure and record the input
wired strip inside a wooden junction box with voltage, output voltage and status of lamp load.
input and output wire pairs coming out of the 6 Increase the AC input to the wired circuit in steps of
box through two point terminal strips. 5 volts up to 250 volts observing the output voltage and
status of the lamp load.
Once the input rises above 240 Volts the output voltage is
expected to become zero and hence the lamp will turn
off If this does not happen even at 250 volts input,
consult your instructor.
7 Switch- OFF mains supply. Repeat steps 4 and 5.
8 Increase gradually the AC input voltage to the wired
circuit till such point at which the load lamp just turns-
OFF and record the input voltage.
76
9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 a few more times to identify a 10 Get your work checked by your instructor.
more closer input voltage at which the output voltage
becomes zero.
TASK 2: Testing of SCR, DIAC of TRIAC
SCR
1 Identify and take any one of the SCR.
2 Select diode mode in multimeter.
3 Connect multimeter positive probe to kathode and

negative probe to Anode (Shoos multimeter shows OL
as in Fig 2 SCR is good condition)
4 Connect multimeter negative probe to kathode and

positive probe to Anode multimeter shows 0.235V as
in Fig 3 SCR is good condition.
TRIAC
1 Identify and take any one TRIAC (Fig 4). 5 Change the selector switch in multimeter to 10k mode.
2 Keep the selector switch in multimeter look mode. 6 Connect positive probe of multimeter to gate terminal
3 Connect positive probe of multimeter to MTI (anode) and MTI negative probe to MT2.
and negative probe to MT2 (Anode 2) in Fig 5. 7 Multimeter shows low resistance (switch ON).
4 Multimeter shows infinity 8 TRIAC is Good condition.
DIAC
1 Identify and take any on DIAC.
2 Select diode mode in multimeter.
3 Connect positive probe of multimeter to MTI (Anode 1)
and negative probe to MT2 (Anode 2) Multimeter shows
OL.
4 Connect positive probe of multimeter of MT2
(Anode 2) and negative probe to MTI (Anode 1).
Multimeter shows OL. DIAC in good condition (Fig 6 &
Fig 7).
5 Multimeter shows low resistance DIAC is in bad

condition.

Measure and plot input and output characteristics of a transistor CE amplifier

• measure and plot the input characteristics of a transistor in CE configuraton
• measure and plot the output characteristics of a transistor in CE configuration.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit • Tag board - 1 No
• DC milliammeter, 0-100mA - 1 Set • Transistors, SL 100, - 1 No
• DC microammeter, 0-500mA - 1 No • Resistors
• DC millivoltmeter, 0-1000mV - 1 No 120W, ¼ W - 1 No
• Regulated DC dual power supply 10kW, ¼ W - 1 No
0-30V/2A - 1 No 3.3kW, ¼ W - 1 No
• Semiconductor data manual - 1 No 1 kW, POT, linear - 1 No
• Hook up wires and patch cords - as reqd
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Measurement and plotting of input characteristics (V versus I ) of given transistor as CE amplifier
BE B
1 Collect the transistor, identify the number, refer the
Table - 2
data book and record the details and condition of the
transistor in Table 1. VCE set at 0 volts, constant
Table - 1 VBE 0 200 300 400 500 600 700
in mV mV mV mV mV mV mV
Label Transistor No or hFE Condition
No and type (typical) from quick IB in
tests A
6 Set VBE = 0 volts by adjusting the pot; Set VCE = 6 volts,
repeat step 5 and record readings in Table 3.
2 Construct the circuit as shown in Fig 1. Table - 3

VCE set at 6 volts constant
VBE 0 200 300 400 500 600 700

in mV mV mV mV mV mV mV
IB
A
7 Set VBE = 0 volts; Set VCE = 12 volts, repeat step 6 and
record the readings in Table 4.
Table - 4
VCE set at 12 volts constant

3 Switch ON 6V DC supply VBB and adjust 1 K pot such
VBE 0 200 300 400 500 600 700
that VBE = 0V.
mV mV mV mV mV mV
4 Adjust the DC supply for VCC to 0 volt such that VCE IB
= 0 volt. A
5 Increase VBE from zero volt, in steps of 100 mV upto
8 Get the recorded readings checked by the instructor.
700 mV; At each setting record value of base current
IB in Table 2. 9 Draw the graph of input characteristics of given
transistor in CE configuration by taking the readings
79
recorded in Tables 2,3 and 4 shown in Fig 2. (Mark VBE
in X-axis and IB in Y-axis).
10 Get the plotted graph checked by the Instructor.
TASK 2: Measurement and plotting of output characteristics of given transistor as CE amplifier.

1 Modify the circuit connections of Task 1 to make 4 Increase IB to values 200 μA, 300 μA, 500 μA and at
variations in VCE and observe/measure IC at different each setting repeat step 3; Record the readings in
values of IB as shown in Fig 3. Table 6, 7 and 8 respectively.
5 Get your recorded readings checked by the Instructor.
6 Draw the graph of output characteristics of given
transistor in CE configuration by taking, plotting the
readings recorded in Tables 5,6,7 and 8 as shown in
Fig 4.
7 Get the plotted graph and get it checked by the
instructor.
8 Calculate the dc using the formula with recorded
readings, find the dc cur-rent gain of the transistor
at VCE of 6V. Record the calculation and result inTable
9.
2 Set VCC to 0V such that VCE = 0V and adjust the supply 9 Compare the calculated value of in step 8 and value
VBB such that IB = 100 μA. noted from the data book at step 1.
3 Vary VCC such that VCE is increased in steps of 0.2V
upto 1V and continue as per the Table 5; observe the
output current IC at each step of VCE and record the
readings in Table 5.
Output characteristics of transistor

Table - 5
IB set at 100 A microAmps constant
VCE 0.2V 0.4V 0.6V 0.8V 1V 2V 3V 4V 5V 6V 7V 8V
IC
Table - 6
IB set at 200 A constant
IC
Table - 7
IC

Table - 8
IC
Table - 9
Current gain,
VCE IB Ic dc IB IC dc IB IC dc
6V 100 A 300 A 500 A

Check for cold continuity of PCB

• inspect and identify any probable defect on the given circuit board
• record the observed defect/fault on the given circuit board.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Rosin cored solder and flux - as reqd.
• Magnifier with lamp - 1 No • IPA cleaning solution - as reqd.
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No. • Solder flux pen/liquid flux - as reqd.
• Soldering workstation/hot air • Cleaning brush - 1 No
temperature/flow controller
(with instruction manual) - 1 Set
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identification of any defect/dry solder/short circuit on the given circuit board.
Note: The instructor has to simulate faults 4 Use magnifier and carefully observe for any broken
necessary in the circuit board to be given for tracks on the board.
this exercise/task.
5 Use Ohm meter and check for any short/open circuit
1 Collect the defective circuit board from the Instructor. between tracks.
2 Clean the board using the brush (Use IPA solution if 6 Record the observations in Table 1.
needed).
7 Get the work checked by the Instructor
3 Visually inspect for any physical damages like cracks/
burnt/dry soldered leads of all the major components
on the PCB.
Table - 1
Sl.No Details of fault/defect identified Types of defect Remarks
Open/short circuit
Dry Solder Loose connecion
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
82
Solder the SMD components in the given PCB

• solder the SMD components on the PCB.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Rosin cored solder wire - as reqd.
• Magnifier with lamp - 1 No. • Flux pen/Liquid flux - as reqd.
• SMD soldering work station (hot air • IFA cleaning solution - 1 bottle
temperature/flow controller) with all • Piece of medium density fiber board - 1 No.
accessories ( and instruction manual) - 1 Set • Crocodile clips holder (MDF borad) - 2 Nos.
• Vacuum pick up tool - 1 No.
• Solder paste tube/syringe - 1 No.
• Cleaning brush - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
1 Choose and fit the appropriate tip for the soldering 8 Hold the component using tweezers and apply the hot
iron suitable to the SMD component onto the PCB. soldering iron tip over the solder pieces to melt.
2 Use crocodile clips to hold the PCB firmly on the work- 9 Remove the soldering iron tip and allow the molten
bench. solder to set on the pin.
3 Select the SMD components and note down the loca- Caution: To avoid thermal buildup, solder the
tion/direction on the PCB to be soldered. terminals alternately with little time interval
4 Switch ON the soldering workstation and adjust the between pins
temperature setting knob around 275°C. 10 Repeat steps to solder the other end of the SMD com-
5 Keep the SMD component over the pads on the printed ponent .
circuit at its position correctly. 11 Use magnifier and inspect the soldered joints are free
6 Use flux pen and apply a little quantity on the places from any solder bridges
where soldering has to be done. 12 Clean the board using IPA solution with brush
7 Cut the solder wire into small pieces and place them 13 Get the work checked by the Instructor.
on SMD component leads.
83
De-solder the SMD Components in the same PCB

• desolder the SMD Components from the PCB following different methods.
Requirements
Materials
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set
• Desoldering wick - as reqd.
• Magnifier with lamp - 1 No
• Solder flux pen/Liquid flux - as reqd.
• SMD rework station with hot air
• IPA Cleaning solution - 1 bottle
nozzles/temperature/flow controller
• Piece of Medium Density
with Instruction Manual - 1 Set
Fiberborad (MDF) - 1 No
• DMM with Probes - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Desolder the SMD component from the PCB
1 Collect the defective SMD-PCB from the Instructor

Fig 2
and identify the components to be removed.
2 Use magnifying glass and inspect the size of solder
joints on the components to be removed as shown in
the Fig 1.
Fig 1
Fig 2 6 After the molten solder has been extracted from the
joint, remove the wick and the soldering iron tip from
the component lead.
7 Use the unused portion of the wick for removing excess
solder.
3 Apply a small quantity of flux and solder to the joints of 8 Repeat the steps 3 to 7 for removing other terminals
the surface mount components to be removed. of the surface mount components.
4 Place one end of solder wicking braid on the 9 Remove the components from the PCB and clean the
component lead side and the tip of the soldering iron surface, using IPA solution.
over it as shown in Fig 2. 10 Get the work checked by the Instructor.
5 Allow time for the solder to melt and the solder wick to
draw the molten solder into the braid by capillary action.
TASK 2 : Desolder SMD components using hot air
Note: Use the MDF board to avoid damage to 1 Choose the appropriate hot air nozzle tip for the
the Workbench or any surface made of plastic desoldering work attach and tighten it using screw
by the hot air. driver.
84
2 Power ON the soldering rework station and adjust the Caution:
hot air and temperature knobs to suit the work.
1 Aim the hot air gun at the same point will
Note: It is recommended to set the air flow and melt the board after a certain period of time
temperature knobs at the middle and test on a
2 Make sure to keep the hot air gun moving
small component, then readjust them to the
to prevent any damage to the heat sensitive
required level around 275°C.
component/PCB burning.
3 Aim the hot air nozzle at the SMD component and
5 Adjust the air flow and temperature setting knobs back
move it slightly back and forth until the solder begins
to zero position after finished the SMD component
to melt.
desoldering work.
4 Use tweezers and carefully grab/lift the SMD
6 Switch OFF the soldering rework station and allow it
component from the board.
to cool down.
7 Clean the board using IPA solution with brush.

Identification of loose / dry solder / broken tracks on printed wired assemblies

• identify any loose/dry solder/broken tracks on the given circuit board
• record the observed defect/faults on the given circuit board.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Rosin cored solder and flux - as reqd.
• Magnifier with lamp - 1 No • IPA cleaning solution - as reqd.
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No. • Solder flux pen/liquid flux - as reqd.
• Soldering workstation/hot air • Cleaning brush - 1 No.
temperature/flow controller (with • jumper wire/multistranded flexible
instruction manual) - 1 Set wire pieces - as reqd.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identification of any defect/dry solder/short circuit on the given circuit board
Note: The Instructor has to simulate faults

4 Use magnifier and carefully observe for any broken
necessary in the circuit board to be given for
tracks on the board.
this exercise/task
5 Record the observations in Table 1.
1 Collect the defective circuit board from the Instructor.
6 Resolder the identified loose or dry-soldered
2 Clean the board using the brush (Use IPA solution if
component; use jumper wire and join the broken track.
needed)
3 Visually inspect and identify any loose/dry soldered
components.
Table - 1
Sl.No Details of fault/defect identified Types of defect Remarks

Open/short circuit
Dry Solder Loose connecion
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
86
Repair solder mask and damaged pad

• repair the damaged pad on the PCB
• repair the solder mask on circuit board.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Circuit bond packs (2 gram
prepackaged Epoxy containers)
syringe type - as reqd
• Soldering workstation - 1 Set
• Wipes/Foam swabs - as reqd.
Materials • Glass/plastic bowls to mix the epoxy - 1 No.
• Kapton tape - as reqd.
• IPA cleaning solution - 1 Bottle
• PCB with damage - as reqd.
• Cleaning brushes - 1 No.
• PCB repair Kit - 1 Set
• Copper oil - as reqd.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Repair the damaged pads on the circuit board

1 Identify the damaged pad and clean the surface with 4 Tin the connecting track on the board surface using
cleaning solvent using a brush. liquid flux and solder & clean the area.
2 Use a dull knife and remove the damaged surface The length of the overlap solder connection
mount pad and a short length of the connecting track should be minimum 2 times of the circuit width.
as shown in Fig 1. The area for the new pad on the board surface
must be smooth and flat.
5 Select a new surface mount pad from a new strip as
shown in Fig 3, which closely matches the surface
mount pad to be replaced.
Note: PCB repair hit for circuit boards must
contain eyelets & setting tools, pads, lands,
tracks, tracks for damaged circuit traces,
adhesive, and colour agents for solder mask
and board repair, dry film, adhesive backed
circuit frames.
3 Use a Knife to scrape any epoxy residue,

contamination or burnt material from the board surface
as shown in Fig 2.
Note: New surface mount pads are fabricated

from copper foil. The foil is plated on the top
side with solder, and an adhesive bonding film
is on the bottom side.
87
6 Before trimming out a new pad, carefully scrape the 9 Select a bonding tip to match the shape of the new
adhesive bonding film from the connecting track as pad. (See bonding tip manual provided with the repair
shown in Fig 4. kit).
The tip used for bonding should be as small as
possible but should completely cover the entire
surface of the new pad.
10 Position the circuit board flat and stable. Gently place
the hot bonding tip onto the High Temperature Tape
covering the new pad. Apply pressure as
recommended in the manual of the repair kit for 5
seconds to tack the new pad in place. Carefully peel
off the tape.
Precaution : Scrape off the epoxy backing only

from the joint connection area. When handling
the replacement contact, avoid touching the
epoxy backing with your fingers or other
materials that may contaminate the surface and
reduce the bond strength.
7 Cut out and trim the new pad. Cut the length to provide
the maximum allowable circuit overlap for soldering.
Minimum 2 times the track width. (Fig 5)
Precaution : Excessive bonding pressure may

cause measling in the circuit board surface or
may cause the new pad to slide out of position.
11 Gently place the bonding tip directly onto the new pad
and apply pressure as recommended in the manual
of the repair kit for an additional 30 seconds to fully
bond the pad.
Note: After the bonding cycle, remove the tape
used for alignment. The new pad is fully cured.
Carefully clean the area and inspect the new
pad for proper alignment.
8 Place a piece of High Temperature Tape over the top 12 Use minimum flux and solder to ensure a reliable
surface of the new pad. Place the new pad in correct connection. Tape may be placed over the top of the
position on the circuit board surface using the tape to new pad to prevent excess solder.
proper alignment. (Fig 6). Note: The overlap solder joint connection
should be a minimum of 3 mm.
13 Mix Epoxy and coat the overlap solder joint connection.
Cure the Epoxy coating as shown in Fig 7.
14 Get the completed work checked by the Instructor.

TASK 2: Apply solder mask on the PCBs
Precaution: Work on the board under ESD- Fig 9

Safe surface to prevent from electrostatic
charges.
1 Inspect and remove the damaged solder mask on the
board completely using knife by gentle scraping.
2 Clean the area using cleaner and brush.
Caution: Surface to be coated must be
throughly cleaned priror to coating to ensure
adequate adhesion, minimised corrosion, and Note: For packaged type, remove the clip and
optimised electrical properties. press the resin and hardener into the Mixing
3 Apply high temperature tape to four sides to expose cup both halves together with your fingers. Mix
the area where the solder mask to be applied as for at least one minute to ensure a complete
shown in Fig 8. mix of the resin and hardener.
Note: The Instructor has to guide the trainees 5 Add color agent to the mixed epoxy to match the circuit
to prepare the epoxy bond board colour. Stir slowly to prevent bubbles.
6 Apply the Solder mask to the board surface as
required. Use a brush or foam swab to apply and
spread the epoxy as shown in Fig 10.
4 For syringe type, remove the caps of syringe that

contains two separate compartments as shown in
Fig 9. Press slowly the contents into the mixing cup.
Use the mixing stick, slowly stir the mixture for 2 7 Get the work checked by the Instructor and keep the
minutes to ensure the resin and hardener have epoxy coated board for 24 hours at room temperature
completely mixed without bubbles. for curing.

Construct and test a CE amplifier and measure the AC & DC load line
• compute the dc and ac parameters for a common-emitter (CE) amplifier
• build a CE amplifier circuit and measure the dc parameters, the ac input resistance, and the voltage gain.
observe the phase relationship between eh input and the output signals
• Test the effects of certain faults in a CE amplifier.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments Capacitors
• Resistors • Two 1 mF
• One 100 • One 47 mF
• One 330 • One 2N3904 NPN silicon transistors
• One 1 k • One 10 k potentiometer
• One 4.7 k • Analog discovery 2
• two 10 k • Jumper wires
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Common-emitter (CE) amplifier
1 Input signal is applied between the base and the 2 The transistor’s emitter is common to both the input
emitter and the output signal is developed between and output circuit, hence, the term common-emitter.
the collector and emitter.
3 A CE amplifier is illustrated in Figure 1 this is the be an ac short. Thus, the ac equivalent circuit does
basic circuit that will be tested. not contain R E2 in this example. Using the
4 A amplify ac signals, the base-emitter junction must superposition theorem, VCC is replaced with a short,
be forward-biased and the base-collector junction placing it at ac ground.
must be reverse-biased. – Replace all capacitors with a short and place VCC at
5 The bias establishers and maintains the proper dc ac ground. Compute the ac resistance of the emitter,
operating conditions for the transistor. The dc r’e from the equation:
parameters are analyzed first as described in after r’e = 25mV/IE
analyzing the dc conditions, the ac parameters for
– Compute the amplifiers voltage gain. Voltage gain is
the amplifier can be evaluated. The equivalent ac
the ratio of the output voltage to the input voltage. The
circuit is drawn in figure 2 the capacitors appears to
input voltage is across the ac emitter resistance to
90
ground which, in this example is, r’e+RE1. The output
AV =
voltage is taken across the ac resistance from the
collector to ground. Looking from the transistor’s – Compute the total input resistance seen by the ac
collector, RL, appears to be in parallel with RC. Also, signal:
IC is approximately equal to Ie. For this circuit is Figure
Rin(tot) = R1 l l R2 l l (r’e+RE1)
9-1b, the output voltage divided but the input voltage ac
can be written: Notice that the ac resistance of the emitter circuit is

multiplied by ac
when it is brought into the base circuit.
TASK 2: Test the effects of certain faults in a CE amplifier
1 Record the values of the resistors listed in Table 1 as 3 Compute the dc parameters listed in Table 2 for the
per the circuit given in Fig 2. CE amplifier shown in figure 2. Note that VB, VE and
Fig 2
VC are with respect to circuit ground. Use the sum of
RE1 and RE2 time IE to compute the dc emitter voltage,
VE. Compute VC by subtracting VRC from VCC.
Enter your computed values in Table 2.
4 Calculate the ac voltage at the collector: this is both

VC and Vout. If do not know the ac for the input
resistance calculation, assume value of 100.
5 Turn on the signal generator and set Vin for 300 mVpp
at 1 kHz with the generator connected to the circuit.
Use the scope to set the proper voltage and check
the frequency. Measure the ac signal voltage at the
transistor’s emitter and at the collector. Note that the
Table 1 signal at the emitter is less than at the base.
Resistor Listed value Measured value
Fig 3
R1 10k
R2 4.7k
RE1 100k
RE2 300k
RC 1.0K
RL 10k Table 3
AC Parameter Computed Value Measured Value
2 Construct the amplifier shown in figure 2. The signal
generator should be turned off. Measure and record Vin = Vs 300mVpp
the dc voltage listed in Table 2. Vs
Re
Table 2
Av
DC Parameter Computed value Measured value Vout=Vc
VB Rin(tot)
VE 6 Remove the bypass capacitor, C2, from the circuit.
IE Measure the ac signal voltage at the transistor’s base,
emitter, and collector. Measure the voltage gain of
VC the amplifier.
VCE

7 Replace C2 and reduce RL to 1k . Observe the ac 8 Replace RL with the original 10kW resistor and open
signal voltage at the transistor’s base, emitter and RE1. Measure the dc voltages at the base, emitter,
collector and measure the voltage gain of the and collector.
amplifier. 11 Replace RE1 and open R2. Measure the dc voltages at
the base, emitter, and collector.

Instrument Mechanic - Oscillators
Demonstrate Colpitt’s oscillator, Hartley oscillator circuits and compare the

output frequency of the oscillator by CRO
• construct and test a Colpitts oscillator
• construct and test a Hartley oscillator
• compare the measured output frequency with calculated frequency.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Resistor ¼ W/CR25
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set 18kW, 390W, 82kW, 3K9 - 2 Nos
• CRO 20 MHz -Dual trace - 1 No each
• Regulated DC power supply 0-30V/2A - 1 No • Capacitor
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No 0.1 mF - 1 No
• Soldering iron 25W/230V - 1 No 0.01 mF - 2 Nos
• Soldering iron stand - 1 No • 2J gang capacitor - 1 No
Materials • Rosin cored solder - as reqd
• Transistor BF 195 - 1 No
• MW oscillator coil - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Construction and testing of a Colpitts oscillator

1 Collect all the required components for assembling/ 4 Prepare the CRO for measuring the output of oscillator.
collect trainer kit & test the component for working
condition. 5 Switch ON the 12VDC supply to the circuit connect
the CRO at the output terminal of the oscillator circuit
2 Plan the layout and assemble the circuit on the and measure the waveform.
breadboard as shown in Fig 1.
6 Adjust the gang capacitor to get the desired frequencyo
Note: If the trainer kit on oscillator is not on CRO.
available, the instructor can use assembled
oscillator for demonstration. Note: The operating range of Colpitts oscilator
3 Get the assembled circuit checked by the Instructor. using medium wave oscillator coil is from 1000
kHz to 2055 kHz Frequency of Colpitts
oscillator can be determined therotically by
using Formula:
1
F=
2π LC
Where ‘C’ is the capacitance of 2J gang and L

is the inductance of the oscillator coil in the
tank circuit.
7 Repeat the above step, by changing the position of

the gang capacitor and record the readings in
Table 1.
8 Draw waveform observed at 3 positions of gang
capacitor and note down the frequencies.
9 Compare the calculated value with observed value of
frequencies.
93
Table 1 10 Get the work checked by the Instructor.
Colpitts oscillator Observation
Conventional
circuit
Position of Amplitude Frequency in Hz

gang capacitor in volts
Calculated Observed
Gang capacitor at
one extreme end
Gang capacitor at
other extreme end
Gang capacitor at
approximately
mid-position
TASK 2 : Construction and testing of a Hartley oscillator
1 Use trainer kit (or) assemble the components as shown

in Fig 2 on breadboard.
Note: Frequency of Hartley oscillator can be
2 Connect the DC supply and set for 12V
determined theoritically by using formula
1
F= , Where ‘C’ is the capacitance of
2π LC
the capacitor C1 in tank circuit and L = L1 +
L2 the effective series inductances of tank
circuit.
8 Repeat the above steps by changing the position of
the gang capacitor and record the readings in
Table 2.
9 Draw waveform observed at different settings of
gauged capacitor and note down the frequencies as
given in Table 2.
Table 2
Conventional
circuit
Position of gang Amplitude Frequency
capacitor in volts in Hz
3 Switch on the supply
Gang capacitor at
4 Switch on the CRO and adjust to get horizontal trace.
one extreme end
5 Connect the CRO in the O/P terminal of the circuit.
Gang capacitor at
6 Observe the output of the circuit in the CRO, adjust other extreme end
the time/div, V/div knobs to get stable wave form.
Gang capacitor at
7 Measure the time period & calculate the frequency of approximately mid-
position
1
oscillator using the formula F= practically.
T 10 Get the work checked by the Instructor.

Construct and test RC phase-shift oscillator circuits

• construct and test RC phase shift oscillator circuit using transistor and vary the output frequency of the
oscillator.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Resistor ¼ W/CR25
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set 10kW, 2k2, 680W, 47kW - 1 No each
• Regulated DC power supply, 0-30V/2A - 1 No • Resistor 4.7kW/¼ W/CR25 - 2 Nos
• CRO, 20 MHz - Dual channel - 1 No • Capacitor 25VDC working
• Digital frequency counter - 1 No 0.01 mF - 3 Nos
• Soldering Iron 25W/230V with stand - 1 No 1mF, 22mF - 1 No each
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No • Transistor BC 107 - 1 No
• POT 4.7kW - 1 No
Materials • Hookup wire - as reqd
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construction and testing of RC phase shift oscillator circuit using transistor
1 Collect all the components from instructor and test
them. 5 Switch ON the 12VDC supply to the RC phase shift
2 Assemble the RC phase-shift oscillator as shown in oscillator circuit and measure the output waveform
Fig 1 on the breadboard. using CRO.
If there is no output, adjust the value of POT
to get the output; even after adjusting the POT
no output is available consult the instructor.
6 Keep the preset VR1 at maximum resistance position
adjust the preset pot and observe the change in
frequency/waveform on CRO.
7 Measure and record the oscillator output frequency
in Table1.
8 Measure the output using frequency counter also
and record the readings in Table 1.
9 Adjust POT suitably and find the minimum and
maximum frequency of oscillations of the circuit.
Record the observations in Table.
10 Compare the calculated and measured frequency of
the oscillator.
4 Preapre the CRO for measurements and connect it
across the output terminals.
Table 1
Output frequency at different positions of R3 preset Calculated frequency _____________ Hz
Sl. Position of Frquency Frequency
No. preset VR1 measured measured using
using CRO freq counter
1 Minimum
2 Middle
3 Maximum
95
Construct and test a crystal oscillator circuit

• construct and test a Crystal oscillator using transistor.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Breadboard - 1 No
• Oscilloscope, 20 MHz Dual trace - 1 No • Hook up wires - as reqd
• Regulated DC power supply • 8.44 MHz Crystal with holder - 1 No
0-30V/2A - 1 No • Capacitors - 25V DC wkg
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No 680pF - 1 No
330pF - 1 No
• Capacitor 0.1mF - 2 Nos
• Transistor BF195 - 1 No
• Resistors ¼ W/CR25
82kW,18kW, 3.9kW, 390W - 1 No each
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Construction and testing of crystal controlled Pierce oscillator

1 Record the frequency marked on the crystal. 3 Connect 12V DC supply to the oscillator circuit.
2 Collect all the required components, test and 4 Prepare the CRO for measurement and connect it
assemble pierce crystal controlled oscillator circuit cross the output of the oscillator.
on breadboard as shown in Fig 1.
5 Adjust the CRO time-base to get a clear sinusoidal
waveform on the screen. Measure and record the
amplitude and frequency of oscillations.
If oscillations are not seen, the crystal may be
bad. Consult your instructor.
6 Decrease the supply voltage to find and record the
minimum VCC voltage at which the crystal oscillator
oscillates satisfac-torily.
7 Get the working of the circuit and the recorded
readings checked by the instructor.
TASK 2 : Construct and test a Pierce Crystal oscillator

1 Frequency marked on crystal : _____________________________
2 (a) Amplitude of oscillations : _____________________________
(b) Frequency of oscillations : _____________________________
3 (a) Minimum VCC at which crystal : _____________________________
oscillator work satisfactorily
(b) Output frequency : _____________________________
(c) Output amplitude : _____________________________
96
Construct and test a clapp oscillator circuit and IC based oscillator circuit
• construct and test a clapp oscillator circuit.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • av zener Diode - 2 Nos

• Trainees kit • Transistor BC547 - 2 Nos
• Oscilloscope, Dual trace, 20 MHz - 1 No./batch • ICLM301 - 1 No
• A.F signal generator - 1 No./batch • Capacitors,
• Regulated PSU, ±12V, 100mA 0.01 F, Disc - 3 Nos
(end product of previous unit) - 1 No./batch 0.1 F, Disc - 3 Nos
• Resistors,
Materials 10 K , ¼ W, Disc - 8 No
• General purpose PCB or bread board - 1 No 47 K , Present - 2 Nos
• Op-Amp, LM 301 or Equivalent - 1 No • Hook up wires - as reqd.
• IC Base, 8 pin DIL - 1 No • Solder and soldering paste - as reqd.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construct and test a clapp oscillator circuit

1 Test the components to confirm their good working
condition.
2 Assemble clapp oscillator circuit referring to Fig 1.
3 Check the circuit connection.
4 Connect and switch on the input supply.
5 Connect the output terminal to CRO.
6 Adjust CRO time base to get a clear sinusoidal wave
on the screen. Measure and record the amplitude
and frequency of oscillations.
7 Get the working of the oscillator checked by your
instructor.
TASK 2: Construct and test IC based Oscillator circuit

1 Test the components to confirm their good working
condition.
2 Assemble IC based oscillator circuit referring to
Fig 2.
3 Check the circuit connection.
4 Connect the output terminal to CRO.
5 Switch on the input supply.
6 Adjust CRO time base to get a clear sinusoidal wave
on the screen.
7 Measure and record the amplitude and frequency of
oscillations.
8 Get the working of the oscillator checked by your
instructor.
97
Instrument Mechanic - Operational Amplifiers
Use analog IC tester to test various analog ICs

• identify various analog ICs with their specifications
• construct and test a clapp oscillator circuit.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments Materials/Components
• Analog/IC Tester with • Assorted analog ICs such as
operating manual - 1 No Op-Amp and timer ICs (IC 74,
• Semiconductor Data book/manual - as reqd LM 324 IC 555) - Minimum
3 Nos each
Keep a minimum of 10 nos of assorted labeled ICs on a table at two places and instruct the trainees to
pick one IC at a time to carry out the testing work.
Instructor should demonstrate the operation of IC tester available in the laboratary. A typical IC tester
is shown in Fig 1.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Identification of various Analog ICs with their specifications and pin diagram
1 Pick one of the labeled IC from the assorted lot and – Open-loop gain AVOL
record its product code /label number printed on the
body. – Minimum output current Iout(min)
2 Refer to the data sheet semiconductor international – Slew rate of the IC

data book for Op-Amp / Timer (which ever applicable) – Any other parameter applicable to this IC
and record the following specifications of the given IC;
– Typical applications.
– Type of package
3 Count the number of pins in the given IC. Make a rough
– Manufacturers name sketch of the IC. Identify and record the pin numbers.
– Number of OP-Amps/timers in the IC 4 Repeat the steps for atleast four different ICs having
– Rated maximum DC supply voltage different product code.
Table 1
Sl.No. Label No. IC Number Manufacturer Vcc AVOL IOUT Application Pin
name max (min) diagram
TASK 2 : Testing of the given Op- Amp and Timer IC with Analog IC Tester
IC Tester has self test button. On pressing it,
The IC tester performs self Diagnostic test its
own hardware. It has two modes of operations
1 Quick test - To test and give result
immediately.
98
2 Stepwise test - To know which portion of 3 Open the level of the ZIF socket and insert the IC into
hardware in IC has failed.In this method, position carefully.
even if one AMP in a dual Op- Amp IC is
GOOD that IC can be used. Note: ZIF socket refers to Zero Insertion Force.It
is a type of socket for mounting electronic
1 Refer to the instruction operation manual of IC tester, devices that is designed not to stress ordamage
familiar with operation of analog/universal IC tester them during Insertion.
available in laboratory.
4 Switch on the power switch of IC tester enter the IC
Fig 1 number on the keypad of the IC tester and press TEST
key and see the result.
Note: The IC tester comprises of programs /set

of testing procedure to test every analog IC
available in its library. it checks the procedures
of various steps and produces the result as
GOOD or BAD on the display provided in it.
5 Find out whether the given IC is GOOD (or) BAD by

observing the display of the IC tester and record the
result in Table 2.
6 Repeat the exercise for at least 3 Op-Amps and 3 Timer
IC to show the difference between good and defective
Table 2
Sl.No. IC No. Mode Condition
Use operator manual note down the library of test of IC
analog ICs of the tester to know which ICs may
be tested with the tester as shown in Fig 1.
2 Pick one of the labelled IC, identify the pin no. 1, orient
it/as per the ZIF socket position.

Construct and test various Op-Amp circuits Inverting, Non-inverting, and

Summing Amplifiers
• construct and test Inverting amplifier using LM 324
• construct and test Non-Inverting amplifier using LM 324
• construct and test summing amplifier and differential amplifier using LM 324.
Requirements
• Analog/Universal IC Tester with • Op-Amp ICs LM324, UA741 - 2 Nos each
instruction manual - 1 No • Breadboard - 2 Nos each
• CRO, 20 MHz Dual trace - 2 Nos • Resistors 10 kW,¼ W/CR25 - 7 Nos
• Semiconductor Data book - 1 No 100 kW,¼ W/CR25 - 1 No
• Analog/Digital multimeter with probes - • Hook up wires/connecting wires - as reqd
1No • IC base (8 pin), DIP - 2 Nos
• Dual regulated DC power supply • Diodes 1N4001 - 4 Nos
0-30V/2A - 1 No
• Function generator - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Construction and testing of an inverting amplifier

1 Collect all the required components from the instructor
Always keep an IC base fixed on the breadboard
and check them with multimeter; use IC tester for
for inserting the Op-Amp IC.
checking ICs.
5 Connect +12V, -12V and GND of dual DC power
2 Identify the type of package and pins of the given Op-
supply to pin 4, pin 11 and GND respectively.
Amp using Data book.
6 Prepare the CRO for measurements and apply 0.2Vp-
3 Refer to circuit diagram shown in Fig 1 and assemble
at the input.
the in-verting amplifier circuit on bread board. p
7 Meaure the output using DMM and CRO.

8 Vary the input voltage and observe the output variations
using multimeter and oscilloscope; record the
observation in Table 1.
9 Change the value of feedback resistor RF and Rin
observe the variation in gain and record them in Table.
8 Get the completed work checked by the Instructor.
TASK 2 : Construction and testing of a non-inverting amplifier using IC LM324

1 Refer to the circuit diagram shown in Fig 2 and 3 Repeat steps 5 to 8 of Task 1 and record the
modify the assemblled circuit on Bread board. observations.
2 Get the assembled circuit checked by the Instructor. 4 Repeat the steps 9, record the observations and
calculate the gain and record them.
100
Table 1
S.No. Input voltage Output voltage Gain normal observed values Gain x Vin= Volt
applied (Vi) Vout / Vin Calculate values
Inverting Non inverting Inverting Non inverting Inverting Non
amplifier amplifier amplifier amplifier amplifer inverting
(Rf/Rin) x Vin (1+(Rf/R1)xVin
1 0.2V
2 0.4V
3 0.6V
TASK 3 : Construction and testing of a summing amplifier using IC LM324

Carry out the experiment on a Bread board. 4 Verify the results obtained & compare with the calculated
The suitable values for input voltage are kept values.
such that.
To apply inputs to noninverting terminal
R exchange the inputs applied on inverting and
f
= non inverting terminals.
Rin
1 Collect all the required items, check the components

and assemble the circuit according to the amplifier
circuit shown in Fig 3.
Note the inputs have been applied to inverting
terminal.
2 Get the assembled circuit checked by the instructor.
3 Switch ON the dual DC power supply measure the
output using multimeter and CRO.
Use the given formula to calculate the output
voltage for summing amplifier.
Observation table
Table 2
S.No. Configuration Output voltage Result
1 When inputs V1, V2 & V3 have been Vo= Is O/P proportional to sum of inputs?
applied on -Ve terminal (Yes / No)
2 When input V1, V2 & V3 have been Vo= Is output proportional to sum of inputs?
applied on +Ve terminal (Yes / No)
Formula to calculate output voltage of summing amplifier
i For Inverting Amplifier
⎛⎛ R ⎞ ⎛R ⎞ ⎛R ⎞⎞ R
Vo = −⎜ ⎜
⎜⎜ R
f × V ⎟ + ⎜ f × V ⎟ + ⎜ f × V ⎟ ⎟ = f V +V + V
1 ⎟ ⎜R 2 ⎟ ⎜R 3 ⎟⎟ R 1 2
(
3
)
⎝ ⎝ in ⎠ ⎝ in ⎠ ⎝ in ⎠⎠ in
ii For Non-Inserting Amplifier
⎛⎛ R ⎞ ⎛ R ⎞ ⎛ R ⎞ ⎞ ⎛ R ⎞
Vo = ⎜ ⎜ 1 +
⎜⎜ Rin ⎟⎠ 1 ⎜⎝ Rin ⎟⎠ 2 ⎜⎝ Rin ⎟⎠ 3 ⎟ ⎜⎝ Rin ⎟⎠ 1 2
(
f ⎟V + ⎜1 + f ⎟V + ⎜1 + f ⎟V ⎟ = ⎜1 + f ⎟ V + V + V
3
)
⎝⎝ ⎠
If Rf = R1
Vo = 2 (V1 + V2 + V3)
TASK 4: Construction and testing of Differential Amplifier using LM324
1 Modify the components values and assemble the 6 Change the input values at V1 and V2 and record the
circuit shown in Fig 4. output readings in Table 3.
2 Get the assembled circuit checked by the instructor. 7 Compare the calculated value with observed.
Note: A Rf1 = Rf2 = Rf and R1 = R2 - Rin
VO Output = (V2 - V1)
Oberservation table
Table 3
Input to Output to Output
Differential (VO) Observed
Amplfier calculated (VO)
V1 V2
0.5V 1V
3 Repeat step 5 of Task 1.
+1V -2V
4 Apply the DC inputs to the differntial amplifier circuit
at pin 2 and pin 3 through 10k resistors as per the -2V +2.5V
Table 3.
5 Measure the output using Multimeter and record in
given table.
Construct and test differentiator and integrator circuits

• construct and test differentiator circuit using Op-Amp IC 741
• construct and test integrator circuit using Op-Amp IC 741.
Requirement
Tools/Equipments/Instruments / Data Book Materials
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Resistors 1kW, 10kW, 4.7kW
• CRO 20MHz dual trace - 1 No ¼ W/CR25 - each 1
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No No
• Voltmeter 0-10V - 1 No • IC 741 Op-Amp - 1 No
• Regulated dual DC • Capacitor 0.1 mF/25V - 1 No
power supply 0-30V/2A - 1 No • Hook up wire - as reqd
• Function generator - 1 No • Breadboard - 1 No
• Graph sheet (Linear) - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construction and testing of a differentiator circuit

1 Collect and check the components for the good working 4 Switch ON the dual power supply and set it to +12V and
condition and assemble the circuit on the bread board -12V and GND as shown in Fig 1.
as shown in Fig 1.
Note: For a differentiator,
VO = RfC
5 Prepare the CRO for measurement and observe the

output waveform on the CRO.
6 Vary the frequency to 1/10T and observe the waveform.
7 Vary the frequency to 1/0.1T and observe the waveform.
8 Draw output and input waveform of the circuit as shown
in 2 on a graph sheet for all the 3 steps.
9 Repeat the above procedure for different input signals
2 Get the assembled circuit checked by the Instructor viz. triangular waveform and sinwave waveform as
Calculate RC time constant(T=RfC). shown in Fig 3.
3 Give a square wave input of 1 Vp-p to the inverting

terminal and set the frequency to 1/T in the function
generator.
103
TASK 2 : Construction and testing of a integrator circuit
1 Check the components for their good working condition 4 Switch ON the dual power supply and set it to +12V, -
and connect the circuit on the bread board as shown 12V and GND connections.
in the Fig 4.
5 Observe the output waveform on the CRO.
6 Vary the frequency to 1/10T and observe the waveform.
7 Vary the frequency to 1/0.1T and observe the waveform.
8 Draw output and input waveform of the circuit as
shown in Fig 5, on a graph sheet for all the 3 steps.
9 Repeat the same procedure for different input signals
viz. square wave, triangular waveform.
10 Get the result checked by the Instructor.
2 Calculate RC time constant(T=R1C).

3 Apply a non sinusoidal input of 1 Vp-p to the inverting
terminal and set the frequency to 1/T in the function
generator.
Note: For a Integrator:
I
VO = - ζ Vin dt
R1C1
Construct and test a voltage to current and current to voltage convert using
Op-Amp
• construct and test voltage to current convertor
• construct and test current to voltage convertor.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments / Data Book • Potentiometer 1 k - 1 No
• +15V DC power supply - 1 Set • OP AMP 740 C - 1 No
• -15V DC power supply - 1 No Materials
• Resistors
• 1k - 2 No • VOMs (or digital multimeters to
• 10 k 1/2W - 2 No measure voltage and current) - 1 No
• Graph sheet (Linear) - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: To construct and test Voltage to current converter

1 Connect the circuit as shown in Fig 1. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for various input voltage and
record the values in Table 1.
5 Get the work checked by your instructor.
Table 1: Voltage to current convertor
Vin’ V iout’ mA
1
2
3
4
6
8
2 Adjust the potentiometer to get an input voltage of 1V.
10
3 Read the output current and record the value in the
given Table 1.
TASK 2: To construct and test Current to voltage convertor

1 Connect the circuit as shown in Fig 2. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for various input voltage and
record the values in Table 1.
Table 2: Voltage to current convertor
Vin’ V iout’ mA
1
2
3
4
2 Adjust the potentiometer to get an input voltage of 1V. 6
8
3 Read the output current and record the value in the
given Table 1. 10
105
Construct and test instrumentation amplifier

• construct and test Instrumentation amplifier circuit using IC LM324.
Requirement
Tools/Equipments/Instruments/Data Book Materials
• Function generator - 1 No • Resistors ¼ W/CR25
• CRO dual trace 20MHz - 1 No 1kW - 4 Nos
• Dual regulated DC power supply 100kW - 4 Nos
0-30V/2A - 1 No 1kW POT - 1 No
• Trainees tool kit - 1Set • IC LM324 - 1 No
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No • Breadboard - 1 set
• Data sheet of the IC LM324 - as reqd
PROCEUDRE
TASK 1: Construction and testing of an Instrumentation amplifier circuit

1 Collect all the components, test them and refer to the 2 Get the assembled circuit checked by the Instructor.
pin out diagram of the IC and assemble the circuit as
per the circuit diagram shown in Fig 1. 3 Set the inputs V1 and V2 at different values but at the
same frequency.
4 Switch ON the dual power supply and set the voltage
+ 15V, -15V and GND.
5 Prepare the CRO for measurements and measure
the output at the output pin.
6 Calculate the theoretical gain from the given formula
and verify the practical values.
Table
Sl.No. Applied input voltage Voltage gain Output voltage Result
AV calculated (Vo) Observed
Output ‘Vo’
1 V1= Vo=
V2 =
106
Identify the pin configuration and check the output voltage of 555 IC
• idenitfy the pin configuration of 555IC
• check the output voltage of 555IC.
PROCEUDRE
TASK 1: Identify the pin configuration 555IC
1 Write the pin function detail in Table1 as shown in

fig 1.
Table 1
Pin number Function

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TASK 2: Check the output voltage of 555 IC
1 Connect power suppy between pin 8 and pin 1.

2 Connect voltmeter between pin 1 and 3.
3 Switch ON the PSU.
4 Keep 6V in PSU.
5 Measure the output voltage in voltmeter. (V0 = >3V will
come) shows IC in good condition.
107
Construct and test astable timer circuit using IC 555

• assemble and test an astable multivibrator circuit using IC 555
• measure pulse repetition frequency (PRF), rise time and fall time of the pulses.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Carbon resistors, ¼ W/CR25
• Regulated DC power supply 0-30/2A - 1 No 1kW - 1 No
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set 10k preset - 1 No
• CRO 20MHz, Dual trace - 1 No • Preset, 10kW - 1 No
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No • Capacitors
0.01 μF/25V - 1 No
Materials 0.1 μF/25V - 1 No
• Bread board - 1 No 4.7 μF/25V - 1 No
• IC base, 8 pin DIL - 1 No • Speaker, 8W, 2" or any small - 1 No
• IC 555 - 1 No speaker (used in pocket radios)
• LED 5mm, Red - 1 No
• Hook up wires -as reqd
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Construction and testing of an astable Multivibrator using IC 555

1 Collect all the required components, check them and 4 Get the calculated values checked by the instructor.
assemble the astable multivibrator circuit on breadboard
as shown in Fig 1. 5 Prepare the CRO for measurements.
6 Switch ON DC voltage to the circuit and check for
continuous rectangular pulses at the output of the
circuit using the CRO.
If there is no output, switch off the voltage to the
cir-cuit and check the circuit connections. Take
the help of the Instructor, if necessary.
7 Measure and record the ON-time, OFF-time and PRF
(pulse repetition frquency) of the output pulses.
8 Measure and record the rise-time and fall-time of the
pulses as shown in Fig 2.

Place and fix the IC in the IC socket ensuring
that the IC pins do not get bent or come out of
the IC base.
3 From the values of the circuit components, calculate
and record the ON-time(tON), OFF-time(tOFF) and the
pulse repetition frequency(PRF) of output.
108
Construct and test monostable timber circuit using IC 555

• assemble and test a monostable multivibrator using IC 555
• use the monostable multivibrator as a touch switch.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Carbon resistors, 1/4 watt

• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No 10 MW - 1 No
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set 33 kW 330W, 1MW - 1 No
• Storage oscilloscope/CRO-0-20 MHz • Capacitors 25VDC - 1 No each
dual trace - 1 No 0.01μF - 2 Nos
• Regulated DC power supply 0-30V/2A - 1 No 4.7μF - 1 No
Materials • Push-button switch (Push-to-ON) - 1 No
• Breadboard - 1 No • Hook up wires - as reqd
• 8-pin IC base - 1 No
• IC 555 - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construction and testing of Monostable multivibrator circuit using IC 555
1 Collect all the materials required and check them.

2 Assemble the monostable multivibrator on breadboard
referring to the circuit diagram shown in Fig 1.
8 Connect the CRO probe at pin No. 2 of the IC; keep

pressing and releasing the trigger button and observe
the trigger input waveform on the CRO. Sketch the
observed waveform in the space provided in the
Table 2.
9 Change the value RA from 33 K to 1 M . Connect the
4 Switch ON the 12VDC supply to the circuit.
LED with a 330 resistor in series at the output pin 3
5 Prepare the CRO for measurements and connect the to GND.
CRO at the output of the monostable multivibrator.
10 Switch ON DC supply to the circuit; press the push-
6 Press the push-button(trigger signal) and observe the button (trigger) and observe the LED glow for a few
output pulse on the CRO. seconds and turn OFF again. Record your observation.
7 Keep pressing and releasing the trigger button and 11 Connect a capacitor 4.7 F and a 8 , 2 inch speaker
measure the ON-time(tON) of the output pulse. Record at the output in series with a capacitor as shown in Fig
the reading in Table 1 & 2. 3.
If the CRO has a storage option, use it to 12 Switch ON the DC supply and listen to the audible sound
measure the pulse width conveniently. Take from the speaker. Change the position of the preset
the help of the instructor to use the storage ’RB’ and check for changed frequency output from the
option. speaker.
109
13 Measure and record output frequencies and duty cycle 2 Rise time of pulse : ________________
at four different positions of preset. (Observed)
14 Get the working of astable multivibrator circuit and the
3 Fall time of pulse : ________________
recorded readings checked by the Instructor.
(Observed)
Note:
4 (a) Audible output heard from speaker : YES/NO
The frequency (or) PRF of Astable multivibrator
is: (b) Frequency/pitch of audible output
from speaker varies with position
of preset : YES/NO
• f==
Table 1
• t OFF = 0.693 x RB x C Resistance Output Waveform

of preset Frequency on CRO
• t ON = 0.693 (RA + RB) C RB
• D = Duty Cycle =
1 (a) Measured ON-time (tON) : ________________

(b) Measured OFF-time (tOFF) :________________
(c) Measured pulse repetition
frequency (PRF) : ________________
(d) Duty cycle : _________________
Construct and test VCO (V to F converter) using IC 555

• construct and test VCO circuit using IC 555.
Requirements
• IC 555 - 1 No
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Capacitor 0.01μF/25V - 1 No
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No • Loud speaker 8W/1W - 1 No
• Regulated DC power supply 0-30V/2A - 1 No • Hookup wire - as reqd
Materials • 10k Linear potentiometer - 1 No
• Bread board - 1 No
• Resistor 100kW, 1kW, 220W
¼ W/CR25 - 1 No each
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construction and testing of VCO circuit using IC 555
1 Collect all the materials required for the circuit dia-

6 Adjust the DC control voltage at pin no. 5 and observe
gram shown in the Fig 1 and check them for their
the sound and measure the effect on the output of the
working condition using multimeter.
circuit.
This observation, conclude that the output of

the circuit (i.e the frequency of astable
multivibrator) varies on varying the control
voltage at pin no. 5 then the circuit behaves as
voltage controlled oscillator.
7 Change the DC control voltage settings as per the

table and record the readings in Table 1.
Table 1
Sl.No. Input Voltage CRO readings
1 1.5V
2 Assemble the components on breadboard according 2 3V
to the circuit shown in Fig 1.
3 4.5V
4 7.5V
4 Switch ON 9V DC supply to the circuit from the
Regulated DC power supply.
5 Preapare the CRO for measurement, and observe the
waveform at pin no.3.
111
Table 1 Table 2
S.No. RA C Time Wave form at Wave form at
Trigger Input Output Pin-3
Calculated Measured
Pin -2
T=1.11 x RAC
1 33k 4.7 F
2 1M 4.7 F
TASK 2 : Construction and testing of Monostable multivibrator as a touch switch

1 Remove the push-button switch connected at pin No.2
of the IC. Connect a wire of about 0.5 metres skinned The circuit is now working as a touch-switch.
at both ends at pin No. 2 of IC. 3 Get the working of the touch-switch checked by the
2 Switch ON DC supply to the circuit. Touch once, the Instructor.
free end of the wire by your fingers and observe the
LED glow. Repeat this step a few more times and record
your observation.
Construct and test 555 timers as pulse width modulator

• construct and test a PWM circuit using IC555 to generate pulse width modulated output.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Resistor
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set 15kW, carbon, ¼ W - 1 No
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No 10kW, carbon, ¼ W - 1 No
• Regulated DC power supply 0-30V/2A - 1 No 5.6kW, carbon, ¼ W - 1 No
• Function generator - 1 No • Capacitors 25V DC
• AF signal generator - 1 No 0.1μF, ceramic disc - 2 Nos
10 μF - 1 No
Materials • LED 5mm, Red - 1 No
• Breadboard - 1 No • Push-button switch (Push-to-ON) - 1 No
• IC 555 - 1 No • Hook up wires - as reqd
• IC Base-8 pin - 1 No
• Diode 1N4001 - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Construction and testing of PWM circuit using IC 555

1 Collect all the materials required identify the 5 Observe the output LED at pin 3 and the brightness
components as per the circuit diagram. Ensure of the LED.
working condition of the components by using
multimeter and IC tester. 6 Prepare the CRO for measurement and observe the
out waveform verify PWM frequency and duty cycle;
2 Assemble the PWM control circuit using IC 555 as record the waveform in Table 1.
shown in Fig 1.
Table 1
3 Switch ON 12V DC power supply.
Function A.F. Generator Output Remarks
4 Connect the square wave input as carrier, from Generator frequency waveform
function generator. Set the waveform to the required frequency
duty cycle and AF signal as message.
7 Get the result checked by the Instructor.
113
Construct and test automatic delay on circuit using 555IC and other discrete
component
• conastruct and test automatic delay on circuit using 555IC.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • LED with holder - 1 No
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Capacitor - 1 No
• Regulated power supply (0-30)V - 1 No • Resistors - 68K, 10K, 220R
• Bread board
Materials • Potentiometer (optional) - 1 No
• 555IC - 1 No
• Push button switch - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construct and test automatic delay on circuit using 555IC

1 Collect the equipments and components and check
the items for its good working condition.
2 Connect them as in the circuit diagram (Fig 1).
3 Switch ON the power supply. (Output is in OFF state).
4 Switch the push Button (via pin 2 OV is applied of is
less than 1/3rd of the supply). Output turns ON.
5 After 32 sec the output Turns OFF automatically.
6 Get the work checked by the instructors.
T = 1.1 RC
T = 1.1 * 68000 * 0.000470
T = 32 sec
114
Instrument Mechanic - Logic Circuits
Identify different logic gates

• identify different logic gates by the IC number printed on them
• identify various ICs and their specifications using data sheet/semiconductor data manual.
Requirements
• Logic Gates (IC) trainer Kit - 1 No • Connecting Patch Cords - as reqd
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No • IC 7400, IC 7408, IC 7432
• Data sheet of ICs used - as reqd IC 74266, IC 7402, IC 7404
IC 7486 - 1 No each
PROCEDURE
Note: The Instructor has to provide/ensure ICs 1 Pick one of the ICs note down the number in Table -1
with their number printed on them is clearly
2 Refer to the data sheet/semiconductor data
visible and all the ICs are inserted on a bread
manual,find the logic gate function,draw the pin out
board safely.
diagram, mark the input, output and supply pin
Safety precaution: Do not touch the pins of numbers.
the ICs with fingers.
3 Repeat the steps for remaining ICs and record the
observations in Table-1.
Table 1
Sl.No. IC number Logic gate Symbol Pin out
diagram
1 IC 7408
2 IC 7432
3 IC 7404
4 IC 7400
5 IC 7402
6 IC 7486
7 IC 74266
115
Verify the truth tables of all logic gate ICs by connecting switches and LEDs
• construct AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR and EX-OR gates using ICs
• verify truth tables of AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR and EX-OR gates using switches and LEDs.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • IC-7486 - 1 No
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • IC-7400 - 1 No
• Regulated DC power supply • SPDT Switches (Miniature Toggle) - 2 Nos
0-30V/2A - 1 No • IC 7404 - 1 No
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No • Hook up wire, red and black - as reqd
• Flexible wires - as reqd
Materials • Resistor/¼ W/CR25 - 1 No
• Breadboard - 1 No • 330 - 1 No
• IC 7408 - 1 No • LED 5mm, Red - 1 No
• IC - 7432 - 1 No • Data sheets of ICs used - as reqd
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Construction and AND gate using IC 7408 and verification of its truth table
1 Collect all the components, check them, refer to the Table 1
data sheet of the IC 7408, assemble the AND gate as
shown in Fig 1 on the bread board. Sl.No. Input Output
A B LED status
1
AND gate Truth table

Sl.No. Input Output
Y=A.B
A B
1 0 0 0
2 Use toggle switches S1 as input A and switch S2 as input
B. 2 0 1 0
3 Get the assemble circuit checked by the Instructor.
3 1 0 0
4 Switch ON 5VDC supply and operate switches S1 & S2
for different levels either in 5V position or zero volt 4 1 1 1
(GND) position as shown in Table 1.
6 Verify the readings with the truth table of AND gate.
5 Observe the status of LED for each step of combinations,
record the observations in Table 1. 7 Get the work checked by the Instructor.
TASK 2 : Construction of OR gate using IC 7432 and verification of its Truth table
1 Collect all the components, check them, refer to the data 2 Repeat steps 2 to 5 of Task 1 and record the
sheet of the IC 7432, assemble the OR gate as shown observations in Table 2.
in Fig 2 on the bread board.
116
Table 2
Sl.No. Input Output
LED status
A B
1
OR gate Truth table

Sl.No. Input Output
3 Verify the readings with the truth table of OR gate.
Y=A+B
A B
1 0 0 0
2 0 1 1
3 1 0 1
4 1 1 1
TASK 3 : Construction of NOT gate using IC 7404 and verification of its Truth table
1 Collect all the components, check them, refer to the data 4 Verify the readings with the truth table of NOT gate.
sheet of the IC 7404, assemble the NOT gate as shown
in Fig 3 on the bread board.
Table 3
Sl.No. Input Output
LED status
A
1
2
NOT gate Truth table

Sl.No. Input Output
A Y=A
2 Use toggle switches S1 as input A. 1 0 1
3 Repeat steps 3 to 5 of Task 1 and record the 2 1 0

observations in Table 3.
TASK 4 : Construction of NAND gate using IC 7400 and verification of its Truth table
1 Collect all the components, check them, refer to the
shown in Fig 4 on the bread board.
2 Repeat steps 2 to 5 of Task 1 and record the
3 Verify the readings with the truth table of NAND gate.
Table 4 NAND gate Truth table
Sl.No. Input Output Sl.No. Input Output
LED status Y=A.B
A B A B
1 1 0 0 1
2 2 0 1 1
3 3 1 0 1
4 4 1 1 0
TASK 5 : Construction of NOR gate using IC 7402 and verification of its Truth table
1 Collect all the components, check them, refer to the Table 5
data sheet of the IC 7402, assemble the NOR gate as
LED status
A B
1
2
3
4
NOR gate Truth table

Sl.No. Input Output
Y=A+B
A B
1 0 0 1
observations in Table 5. 2 0 1 0
3 Verify the readings with the truth table of NOR gate. 3 1 0 0
4 1 1 1
TASK 6 : Construction of EX-OR gate using IC 7486 and verification of its Truth table
1 Collect all the components, check them, refer to the data Table 5
sheet of the IC 7486, assemble the EX-OR gate as
LED status
A B
1
2
3
4
NOR gate Truth table

Sl.No. Input Output
Y=A+B
A B
2 Repeat steps 2 to 5 of Task 1 and record the 1 0 0 1
observations in Table 6. 2 0 1 0
3 Verify the readings with the truth table of EX-OR gate. 3 1 0 0
4 1 1 1
Construct and verify the truth table of all the gates using NAND and NOR gates
• construct AND, OR, NOT, NOR, EX-OR and EX-NOR gates using NAND gate
• construct AND, OR, NOT, NAND, EX-OR and EX-NOR gates using NOR gates.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • IC 7402 - 2 Nos

• Logic probe - 1 No • Hook up wires - as reqd
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • 14 pin IC base - 4 Nos
• Regulated DC power supply 0-30V/2A - 1 No • Toggle switches miniature type SPDT - 2 Nos
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No • Bread board - 1 No
Materials • Resistor - 330W/1/4W - 1 No
• Digital IC data manual - 1 No
• IC 7400 - 2 Nos
Note:
1 The Instructor has to guide the trainees to record 5VDC given to gate input as logic high (1) and GND
(zero volt) as logic low (0)
2 The condition of LED ON as Logic ‘1’ and OFF as logic ‘0’.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construction of AND gate circuit using NAND gate IC 7400 and verification of its truth table
1 Collect all the components, check them, refer to the data AND gate Truth table
sheet of the IC 7400, assemble the AND gate as shown
in Fig 1 on the bread board. Sl.No. Input Output
Y=A.B
A S1 B S2
1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0
3 1 0 0
4 1 1 1
Table 1
Sl.No. Input Output
2 Use toggle switches S1 as input A and switch S2as input LED Condition
B.
A S1 B S2
1
2
for different logic levels either in 5V position or zero volt
position as shown in Table 1. 3
5 Observe the LED for each step of combinations, 4
record the observations in Table 1. 6 Get the work checked by the Instructor.
119
TASK 2: Construction of OR gate circuit using NAND gate and verification of its truth table
1 Rearrange the connections and assemble the OR gate OR gate Truth table
circuit using NAND gates as shown in Fig 2 on bread
board. Sl.No. Input Output
Y=A+B
2 Repeat steps 2 to 5 of Task 1 and record the observations
in Table 2. A B
3 Verify the readings with the truth table of OR gate. 1 0 0 0

2 0 1 1
4 Get the work checked by the Instructor. 3 1 0 1
Note: Use logic probe to check the status of 4 1 1 1
each pin to confirm the functioning of each gate.
Table 2
Sl.No. Input Output
LED
A B
1
2
3
4
TASK 3: Construction of NOT gate circuit using NAND gate and verification of its truth table
1 Rearrange the connections and assemble the NOT gate NOT gate Truth table
circuit using NAND gates as shown in Fig 3 on bread
board. Sl.No. Input Output
Y=A
A
1 0 1
2 1 0
Table 3
Sl.No. Input Output

LED
A
1 0
2 Use toggle switch S1 as input A.
2 1
TASK 4: Construction of NOR gate circuit using NAND gate and verification of its truth table
1 Rearrange the connections and assemble the NOR
gate circuit using NAND gates as shown in Fig 4 on
bread board.
2 Repeat steps 2 to 5 of Task 1, and record the observations
in Table 4.
3 Verify the readings with the truth table of NOR gate.
Note: Use logic probe to check the status of
NOR gate Truth table Table 4
Y=A+B LED
A B A B
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 1 1 2
3 1 0 1 3
4 1 1 1 4
TASK 5: Construction of EX-OR gate circuit using NAND gate and verification of its truth table
1 Rearrange the connections and assemble the EX-OR
bread board.
EX-OR gate Truth table
Sl.No. Input Output
Y=A B
A B
1 0 0 0
2 0 1 1
3 1 0 1
4 1 1 1
Table 5
Sl.No. Input Output
LED
A B
2 Repeat steps 2 to 5 of Task 1, and record the
1
2
3 Verify the readings with the truth table of EX-OR gate. 3
4
TASK 6: Construction of EX-NOR gate circuit using NAND gate and verification of its truth table
1 Rearrange the connections and assemble the EX-NOR
EX-NOR gate Truth table
bread board. Sl.No. Input Output
Y=A B
A B
1 0 0 0
2 0 1 1
3 1 0 1
4 1 1 1
Table 6
Sl.No. Input Output
LED
observations in Table 6. A B
3 Verify the readings with the truth table of EX-NOR gate. 1

2
4 Get the work checked by the Instructor. 3
Note: Use logic probe to check the status of 4
TASK 7: Construction of AND gate using NOR gate IC 7402 and verification of its truth table
AND gate Truth table
Sl.No. Input Output
Y=A.B
A B
1 0 0 0
2 0 1 1
3 1 0 1
4 1 1 1
Table 7
Sl.No. Input Output
LED
2 Repeat steps 2 to 5 of Task 1, and record the A B
1
3 Verify the readings with the truth table of AND gate. 2
4
TASK 8: Construction of OR gate using NOR gate IC 7402 and verification of its truth table
1 Collect all the components, check them, refer to the data OR gate Truth table
sheet of the IC 7402, assemble the OR gate as shown
Y=A+B
A B
1 0 0 0
2 0 1 1
3 1 0 1
4 1 1 1
Table 8
Sl.No. Input Output
LED
observations in Table 8. A B
3 Verify the readings with the truth table of OR gate. 1
2
Note: Use logic probe to check the status of 4
TASK 9: Construction of NOT gate using NOR gate IC 7402 and verification of its truth table
data sheet of the IC 7402, assemble the NOT gate as
3 Verify the readings with the truth table of NOT gate.
NOT gate Truth table Table 9
Y=A LED
A A
1 0 1 1
2 1 0 2
TASK 10: Construction of NAND gate using NOR gate IC 7402 and verification of its truth table
1 Collect all the components, check them, refer to the data
sheet of the IC 7402, assemble the NAND gate as shown EX-OR gate Truth table
Y=A B
A B
1 0 0 0
2 0 1 1
3 1 0 1
4 1 1 1
Table 10
Sl.No. Input Output
LED
A B
1
2
3 Verify the readings with the truth table of NAND gate. 3

each pin to confirm the functioning of each
gate.
TASK 11: Construction of EX-OR gate using NOR gate IC 7402 and verification of its truth table
EX-OR gate Truth table
data sheet of the IC 7402, assemble the EX-OR gate as
Y=A B
A B
1 0 0 0
2 0 1 1
3 1 0 1
4 1 1 1
Table 11
Sl.No. Input Output
LED
2 Repeat steps 2 to 5 of Task 9, and record the A B
1
3 Verify the readings with the truth table of EX-OR gate. 2
4
123
TASK 12: Construction of EX-NOR gate using NOR gate IC 7402 and verification of its truth table
1 Collect all the components, check them, refer to the data
sheet of the IC 7402, assemble the EX-NOR gate as EX-OR gate Truth table
Y=A B
A B
1 0 0 0
2 0 1 1
3 1 0 1
4 1 1 1
Table 12
Sl.No. Input Output
LED
A B
1
2
2 Repeat steps 2 to 5 of Task 9, and record the 3
4
3 Verify the readings with the truth table of EX-NOR gate.
124
Use digital IC tester to test various digital ICs (TTL and CMOS)
• identify the IC manufacturers' names from the logo given on the IC and manufacturers data
• identify IC code number printed on the given digital IC
• identify the type of package of the given digital IC (TTL and CMOS)
• identify the logic family of the given digital IC referring databook
• identify the pin numbers of the given Digital IC referring data book
• test the given IC using digital IC tester.
Requirements
• Digital IC databook - 1 No • Assorted Digital ICs
• Digital IC tester with manual - 1 No (both TTL and CMOS types) - 10 Nos
• DMM with probes - 1 No • Breadboard - 1 No
Note: The Instructor has to label all the ICs serially

Keep a minimum of 20 numbers of assorted labeled TTL and CMOS ICs for thtis exercise. Instruct the
trainees to pick one IC at a time and carryout the exercise.
Demonstrate setting the controls and testing ICs using digital IC tester. No detailed procedure for using
IC tester is given as different IC testers used in different institures may have different operating procedures
and specification.
PROCEDURE
1 Identify operator controls, switches and IC socket on 5 Count and record the number of pins on the IC.
the digital IC tester as shown in Fig 1 with reference to
the manual. 6 As demonstrated by the instructor, test and record the
condition of the IC using digital IC tester for atleast 10
2 Pick one of the labeled IC from the assorted lot and different ICs both in TTL and CMOS types.
record its label number.
Note: Follow the procedure demonstrated by
3 Refer to the data manual interpret the manufacturer’s the instructor for setting the controls on digital
logo given on the IC or alphabets used for the IC type IC tester while testing the IC.
identify and record the details in Table 1.
7 Get the recorded information checked by the instructor
4 Identify and record the logic family supply voltage and for 10 different ICs.
function of the IC referring the data manual.
125
TABLE 1
Sl. Label No. Code No. of No.of Logic family Function Package Maximum Condion
No. IC IC pins type VCC voltage of IC tested
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Fig 1
DIGITAL IC TESTER
Construct and verify the truth table of all the gates using DTL circuit
• construct and verify the truth table of NOT gate using DTL circuit
• construct and verify the truth table of AND gate using DTL circuit
• construct and verify truth table of OR gate using DTL circuit
• construct and verify truth table of NAND gate using DTL circuit
• construct and verify truth table of NOR gate using DTL circuit.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments/Data manual • Diode IN 4001 - 10 Nos
• Trainees tool kit - 1 set • Transistor BC547 - 10 Nos
• DMM with probes - 1 No • Zener Diode Z9V1 - 10 Nos
• Resistors +5k - 8 Nos
Materials/Components • Resistors 3 K9 - 8 Nos
• Breadboard - 1 No • LED Red color - 5 Nos
• Connecting patch cards - as reqd
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construct and verify the truth table of NOT gate using DTL circuit
1 Collect the equipment and component and check the

3 Switch ON the input supply it
4 Verify the truth table and note it table 1.
Truth Table 1
Input Output
A Y
1
0
TASK 2: Construct and verify the truth table of AND gate using DTL circuit
1 Collect the equipments and components and check the
3 Switch ON the input supply.
4 Verify the truth table of AND gate and note it in the
table 2.
127
Truth Table 2
Input Output
A B Y
1 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
TASK 3: Construct and verify the truth table of OR gate using DTL circuit
1 Collect the equipments and components and check the Truth Table 3
items for its good working condition. Input Output
2 Connect them as in the circuit diagram (Fig 3). A B Y
3 Switch ON the input supply. 1 0
4 Verify the truth table of OR gate and note it the table 3. 0 1
5 Get the work checked by the instructor. 1 0
1 1
TASK 4: Construct and verify the truth table of NAND gate using DTL circuit
1 Collect the equipments and components and check the
4 Verify the truth table of NAND gate and note it the
table 4.
Truth Table 3
Input Output
A B Y
1 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
TASK 4: Construct and verify the truth table of NOR gate using DTL circuit
1 Collect the equipments and components and check the Truth Table 5
INPUT OUTPUT
A B Y
1 0
4 Verify the truth table of NOR gate and note it the
table 5. 0 1
5 Get the work checked by the instructor. 1 0

1 1
Construct half adder circuit using ICs and verify the truth table
• construct the half adder circuit and verify the truth table.
Requirements
• Soldering iron 25W/230V - 1 No • IC-7486 with base - 1 No
• Logic probe - 1 No • IC-7400 with base - 1 No
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Data sheet of ICs used - 1 No each
• Regulated DC power supply 0-30V/2A - 1 No • LED 5mm Red, Green - 2 Nos
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No • Resistor 330W/¼ W/CR25 - 2 Nos
• Miniature toggle switch SPDT - 3 Nos
• Solder, flux - as reqd
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construction of Half Adder circuit and verification of truth table

1 Collect all the components, check them and assemble 6 Verify readings with truth table of Half Adder.
the Half adder circuit as shown in Fig 1on breadboard.
Use logic probe to check the status of each pin
to confirm the functioning of the gate.
Truth Table of Half Adder

Sl.No. Input Output
A B Sum Carry
1 0 0 0 0
2 0 1 1 0
3 1 0 1 0
4 1 1 0 1
Use 14 pin IC base on the bread board for this Table 1

task.
Sl.No. Input Output
2 Use toggle switch S1 as input A and switch S2 as
A B Sum Carry
input B.
1 0 0 0 0
2 0 1 1 0
3 1 0 1 0
for different logic levels either in 5V position for zero volt
(GND) position as shown in Table 1. 4 1 1 0 1
5 Observe the LEDs for each step of combinations, 7 Get the work checked by the instructor.
record your observations in Table 1.
130
Construct Full adder with two Half adder circuit using ICs and verify the truth
table
• construct and test full adder using half adder circuits.
Requirements
• Soldering iron 25W/230V - 1 No • IC-7486 with base - 1 No
• Logic probe - 1 No • IC-7400 with base - 1 No
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Data sheet of ICs used - as reqd
• Regulated DC power supply 0-30V/2A - 1 No • LED 5mm Red, Green - 1 No each
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No • Resistor 330W/¼ W/CR25 - 2 Nos
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Construction of Full Adder using two Half Adder circuits and verification of truth table
1 Collect all the components, check them and assemble Truth table of Full Adder
the Full adder circuit as shown in Fig 1on breadboard.
Sl.No. Input Output
A B C Sum Carry
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 1
3 0 1 0
4 0 1 1
5 1 0 0
6 1 0 1
7 1 1 0
8 1 1 1
Table 1
Sl.No. Input Output

2 Use toggle switch S1 as input A and switch S2 as input
A B C Sum Carry
B and switch S3 as inpuct C.
3 Get the assembled circuit checked by the Instructor. 1
2
4 Switch ON 5VDC supply and operate all the switches 3
for different logic levels either in 5V position for zero volt 4
(GND) position as shown in Table 1. 5
5 Observe the LEDs for each step of combinations, 6
record the observations in Table 1. 7
8
6 Verify readings with truth table of Half Adder.
each pin to confirm the functioning of the gate.
131
Construct and test a Half subtractor & Full subtractor circuits

• construct and test half subtractor
• construct and test full subtractor.
Requirements
Equipments/Instruments • DC power supply (5V) - 1 Set

• Resistor (1K) - 5 Nos • Red/Green LEDs - 2 Nos.
• ICs (XOR-7486, AND-7408, • Connecting wires
OR-7432, NOT-7404) • Breadboard
• A surface mount dip switch - 1 Set
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Construct and testing half subtractor
1 Construct an half subtractor circuit as given in Fig 1 on

the given bread board.
2 Connect the ICs properly to power supply (pin 14) and
ground (pin 7) following the schematics for different ICs
as shown in Fig 3.
3 Using dip switch and resistors, facilitate all possible
combinations of inputs from the power supply.
4 Turn on power to your experimental circuit.
5 For each input combination, note the logic state of the
outputs as indicated by the LEDs (ON = 1; OFF = 0),
and record the result in the table 1.
6 Compare your results with the truth table for operation.
7 When you are done, turn off the power to your
experimental circuit.
TASK 2: Construction and Testing full subractor
1 Construct an full subractor circuit as given in Fig 2 on 4 Turn on power to your experiment circuit.
the given bread board.
5 For each input combination, note the logic state of the
2 Connect the ICs properly to power supply (pin 14) and outputs as indicated by the LEDs (ON=1; OFF=0), and
ground (pin 7) following the schematics for different ICs record the result in the table 2.
as shown in Fig 3.
6 Compare your results with the truth table for operation.
3 Using dip switch and resistors, facilitate all possible
7 When you are done, turn off the power to your
combinations of inputs from the power supply.
experiemental circuit.
132
Table 1 Table 1
Half Subtractor Full Subtractor
A B Q BIN BN-1 A B Q BIN
0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 0
1 1 0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
Construct the adder cum subtractor circuit and verify the result
• construct a 4 bit binary adder circuit using IC 7483, IC7486 and verify the result
• construct a 4 bit binary subtractor circuit using IC7483, IC7486 and verify the result.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • IC-7486 with base (14 pin) - 1 No
• IC-7483 with base (16 pin) - 1 No
• Soldering iron 25W/230V - 1 No
• Regulated DC power supply 0-30V/2A - 1 No
• Connecting wires - as reqd
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No
• Resistor 330W ¼ W/CR25 - 2 Nos
• Logic probe - 1 No
• Data sheet of ICs used - as reqd
• LED 5mm, Red - 4 Nos
Materials • LED 5mm, Green - 1 No
• Miniature toggle switch SPDT - 3 Nos • Resistor 330W/¼ W/CR25 - 5 Nos
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construction and testing of 4 bit binary adder circuit

1 Collect all the components required, test them refer to 3 Use toogle switch S5 as data input B0, switch S6 as data
the data sheet of ICs, asssemble the 4 bit binary adder input B1, and switch S7 as data input B2, and switch S8
circuit as shown in Fig 1 on bread board. as data input B3 and switch S9 as mode select switch
2 Use toggle switch S1 as data input A0, switch S2 as data as shown in Fig 1.
input A1, and switch S3 as data input A2, and switch S4 4 Get the assembled circuit checked by the Instructor.
as data input A3 as shown in Fig 1.
134
5 Switch ON 5VDC supply and operate switches S1 to S8 6 Observe the status of all the five LEDs for each step of
for different logic levels either in 5V position or zero volt combinations record them in Table 1.
(GND) position keeping the switch S9 at END positon to
operate the circuit as 4 bit binary adder as shown in
Table 1.
Table 1
Mode switch=OV Mode switch=5V
Sl.No Inputs Inputs Status of LEDs Status of LED

A3 A2 A1 A0 B3 B2 B1 B0 Carryout Q3 Q2 Q1 Q0 C out Q3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Carryout
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TASK 2: Construction and testing of 4 bit binary subtractor circuit

Use the assembled circuit for 4 bit binary subtractor 3 Observe the status of all the five LEDs for each step of
function/operation with following steps. combinations and record them in Table 1.
1 Set/toggle the mode select switch S9 to 5VDC position 4 Get the work checked by the Instructor.
(Logic ‘1’)
2 Switch ON 5VDC supply and operate switches S1 to S8
for different logic levels either in 5V position or zero volt
(GND) position as shown in Table 1.
Identify different Flip-Flop ICs by the number printed on them

• identify different Flip Flop by the number printed on the ICs.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • 74 LS 73
Aids: Data sheet of ICs used for this exercise 74 LS 74
74 LS 76 - 1 No each
74 LS 107
74 LS 109
Note: Instructor has to label the different types of logic gates ICs.
PROCEDURE
1 Collect the labelled flipflop ICs from the Instructor Note:

2 Pick one of the IC from the lot, and identify the code 1 The Instructor has to provide/ensure the
number printed on the IC and noted in Table -1 Flipflop ICs with their number printed on
3 Refer to the data sheet of the IC, draw the pinout them is clearly visible.
diagram and mark the details in Table 1. 2 Insert all the ICs on the breadboard.
4 Repeat the steps 2 and 3 for remaining labelled logic Safety Precaution: Do not touch the pins of
gates. ICs with fingers.
Table 1
Sl.No. IC Number Logic gates function Symbol Pinout diagram
1 74LS73
2 74LS74
3 74LS76
4 74LS107
5 74LS109
136
Construct and test R-S Flip-flop using IC 7400 with clock and without clock
pulse
• construct and test R-S flip-flop using IC 7400 without clock pulse
• construct and test RD flip-flop with clock pulse.
Requirements
• DC power supply 0-30VDC/2A - 1 No • IC-7400 NAND gate with data sheet - 1 No
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No • Miniature toggles switch - 2 Nos
• LED 5mm, Red, Green - 1 No each
• Resistor 330W/¼ W/CR25 - 2 Nos
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construction and testing of R-S Flip-Flop without clock pulse using IC 7400
1 Collect all the components required, check them and
2 Get the assembled RS flipflop circuit checed by the
assemble the RS flipflop circuit on the breadboard as
Instructor.
shown in Fig 1.
3 Switch ON 5DVC supply to the circuit, use switches
S1 and S2 for setting input logic levels as shown in
Fig 1.
4 Operate the switches to apply different logic levels
and observe corresponding output.
5 Record the status of LEDs for each step of logic
levels.
Table 1
RS flip-flop using NAND gate
Input Output
S R Q Q - LED Status Q Q - LED Status Operating

(ON/OFF) (ON/OFF) Mode
0 1 Set
1 1 No Change
1 0 Reset
1 1 No Change
0 0 Forbidden
137
TASK 2 : Construction and testing of RS flipflop with clock pulse using IC 7400
1 Modify the RS flipflop circuit into clocked RS flipflop 2 Connect switches S1 and S2 at R and S inputs re-
circuit as shown in Fig 2. spectively.
3 Switch ON 5VDC supply to the circuit, operate
switches S1,S2 apply differnt logic levels to the input
keeping clock input at ground/negative.
4 Observe the status of LEDs for the above four steps
5 Connect the clock input to +5VDC and repeat steps 3
and 4 and record the obsevations for next four steps.
Table 2
Input Output
Clock
Input S R Q Q-LED Q Q-LED
Status Status
(ON/OFF) (ON/OFF)
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
0 0 0
1 0 1
1 0 0
1 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
Verify the truth tables of Flipflop ICs (RS, D, T, JK, MSJK) by connecting
switches and LEDs
• construct and verify the truth table of RS flip flop by connecting switches and LEDs
• construct and verify the truth table of D flip flop by connecting switches and LEDs
• construct and verify the truth table of T.flip flop by connecting switches and LEDs
• construct and verify the truth table of JK flop by connecting switches and LEDs
• construct and verify the truth table of JK flip flop by connecting switches and LEDs.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • IC MC74HC 73 (Dual/JKFlip-Flop) - 1 No
• Trainees tool kit - 1Set • IC 74LS76 (JK-FF) - 1 No
• DC power supply - 0-30V/2A - 2 Nos • Resistors 330W/¼ W/CR25 - 4 Nos each
• DMM with probes - 1 No • LED (Red,Green) - 1 No each
• Toggle switch - 4 Nos
Materials • Connecting wire - as reqd
• Breadboard - 1 No • Battery (9V) - as reqd
• IC 74 HC00 (Quad Nand Gate) - 2 Nos Aids: • Semicondutor digital IC-Data manual
• IC 74LS10 (3 Input NAND) - 1 No • charts
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construction of JK flipflop circuit and verification of the truth table.

• Assemble a JK flip-flop circuit by referring to Fig 1 on • Get the circuit checked by the Instructor.
a bread board.
• Apply different Inputs to J and K, as given in truth
table 4 and record the corresponding output levels
and the status of the LED.
• Thus for different inputs at JK flip-flop corresponding
output can be seen through LED Q and Q.
Table 1
Truth table of JK Flip Flop
Clock Inputs Outputs

Input
H/L Preset Clear J K Q Q
X 0 0 X X 1 1
X 0 1 X X 1 0
X 1 0 X X 0 1
L 1 1 0 0 0 Q
L 1 1 1 0 1 0
L 1 1 0 1 0 1
L 1 1 1 1 Toggles Toggles
L 1 1 X X Q Q
• Get the work checked by the Instructor.
139
Construct and test 7493 as a modulus-12 counter

• construct and test modulus 12 counter using TTL IC-7493.
Requirements
• DC power supply 0-30V/2A - 1 No • IC 7493 - 1 No
• DMM with probes - 1 No • LED 5mm, Red - 5 Nos
• Clock pulse generator - 1 No • Resistor 330W/¼ W/CR25 - 5 Nos
• Dual trace CRO-20 MHz - 1 No • Connecting wire (hook - up) - as reqd
• IC 7447 & 7 segment display - 1 Set
The 7493 is a four - bit ripple type binary counter. It consists of four flip-flops which are connected as shown
in Figure below. In order to function as a four-bit counter, CP1 must be externally connected to QA. If both
the master reset pins MR1 and MR2 are raised high, the four-bit flip-flops are reset to zero.
PROCEDURE
1 Connect the modulus 12 counter using 7493 on bread

board referring to circuit shown in Fig 1 & 2.
2 Connect QC & QD (pins 8 & 11) to MR1 & MR2 (pins 2
&3) respectively.
3 Get the assembled circuit checked by the instructor
4 Switch on +5V regulated DC power supply.
5 Press CLEAR-A & CLEAR-B push buttons switch
once, to clear the outputs of all flip flops.
6 Record the Q-outputs (QA to QD) of all the 4-flip flops

based on the LEDs status.
7 Apply one clock pulse at the input (first PIN of IC-7493
i.e Cp1) using the single shot pulser.
8 Record the output logic levels and the status of LEDs
A,B,C,D in Table 1.
9 Repeat the steps with 7-segment driver IC 7447 & 7seg
display as shown in Fig 3 of Ex 2.9.159.
140
Construct and test a four bit synchronous binary counter using IC 74163
• construct and test synchronous binary counter using IC 74163.
Requirements
• Mulitmeter with probes - 1 No • Breadboard - 1 No
• DC power supply, 0-30V/2A - 1 No • I.C 74LS47 - 1 No
• Clock pulse generator 1 Hz - 1 No (BCD-to-7 segment decoder chip)
• Dual trace CRO, 0-20 MHz - 1 No • IC 74LS163 (synchronous binary counter) - 1 No
• IC 7404 - 1 No
• Lengths of jumper wire/connecting
wire (hook-up) - as reqd
Inside the IC74163

There are two separate enable inputs, ENT and ENP, setting either of these inputs to logic 0 stops counting
asynchronously. Ripple Carry Output (RCO) is normally at logic 0 and goes to logic 1 when counter reaches
its highest count i.e., '1111'. It is used in cascading multiple 74163 ICs. Load is an active, low input which
allows the count on 'ABCD' to reflect on 'QAQBQCQD' at active clock edges. CLR is also an active low input
which clears counter as asynchronously to '0000'.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Construction and testing of synchronous binary counter

1 Collect all the components, check them and assemble
the circuit on the breadboard as shown in
Fig 1. The Pin details of IC 74163 is shown in Fig 2.
3 Apply clock pulses using pulse Generator and observe
the counter outputs in LEDs and noted in Table 1.
4 Make CLR input to logic-0 and reset the counter.
5 Repeat counting by making CLR input to logic - 1.

6 Use IC 74LS47 and 7 - segment LED as shown in
previous exercise 2.9.159 to obtain & view a decimal
- counted value on display.
7 Record the readings in Table 1.
141
Table 1
Input Four bit mod-12 counter

Count QD QC QB QA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
8 Get the recorded reading checked by the Instructor.
Construct and test synchronous Decade counter

• construct and test synchronous decade counter.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • IC 74LS90 (Decade counter) - 1 No
• DC power supply, 0-30V/2A - 1 No • IC 7447 (7-seg driver) - 1 No
• Logic with probes - 1 No • 7-seg display - 1 No
• LED Red, Green - 4 Nos
1 Assemble a ripple binary counter on a breadboard

referring to the circuit shown in Fig 1. Table 1
Clock Pulse QD QC QB QA
3 Switch on +5V regulated DC power supply. Press
CLEAR push button switch once, to clear the outputs. 0 0 0 0 0
Observe the Q-outputs (Q0 to Q3) based on the LEDs
status (ON/OFF) in Table 1 of record sheet. 1 0 0 0 1
4 Apply one clock pulse at the input at pin 14 and record 2 0 0 1 0
the output logic levels. Observe outputs of IC 7490
using logic probe. 3 0 0 1 1
5 Repeat step 4 and verify the output logic levels for 4 0 1 0 0
successive clock pulse input and observe the status
of output QA, QB, QC and QD after giving each clock 5 0 1 0 1
pulse at the input as shown in Table 1.
6 0 1 1 0
6 Repeat step 3 to clear the output of all flip-flops.
7 0 1 1 1
7 Use IC 74LS47 and 7-seg display to observe the count
value in decimal. 8 1 0 0 0
8 Get the work checked by the Instructor and observe 9 1 0 0 1
counter output on 7 seg display.
143
Construct and test an UP/DOWN synchronous decade counter using 74190 and
monitor the output on LEDs
• construct an up/down counter using IC 74LS190
• test the counter for counting UP and counting DOWN.
Requirements
• Regulated power supply 0-30V/2A - 1 No • IC74LS190 - 1 No
• Logic probe - 1 No (Up/down decade counter)
• Single shot pulser - 1 No • LED 5mm
(Red, Green, Amber, Yellow) - 1 No each
• Resistors 220W, ¼ W/CR25 - 4 Nos
• Switches SPDT - 2 Nos
• Connecting wires/ Hook up wires - as reqd
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construction of synchronous UP/DOWN decade counter using 74 LS190

the circuit of a up/down decade counter on a
breadboard using IC74LS190 as shown in Fig 1.
Note:
• Up/Down decade counter counts from 0 to 9
and then recycles to ‘0’ again.
• Pin-5 determines the direction of count when
this input is high the counter counts down,
when it is low, the counter counts up.
• MAX/MIN - The output at this pins counts high
when the counter is reached at NINE (1001).
TASK 2: Setting the decade counter to count-up mode and test
1 Switch ON the supply and apply +5V regulated DC 5 Record the logic levels at Q3, Q2, Q1, and Q0 using the
supply to the circuit. logic probe in Table 1.
2 Apply logic-0 to the control pin D/ to make the counter 6 From the recorded readings at steps 4 and 5 conclude
count-up through a toggle switch. whether the counter is counting-up or down.
3 Apply logic 0 to the pins D0 to D3. Apply logic-0 to the 7 Get the recorded output and your conclusion checked
control pin momentarily and raise it back to Logic- by the Instructor.
1 state with a toggle switch.
8 Repeat steps 3, 4, 5 and 6 to recheck satisfactory
working of the counter.
This sets output Q3, Q2, Q1, Q0 to logic-0 levels.
4 Refer Table 1 of record sheet and feed clock pulses at

clock input (pin 14) using single shot pulser. Record
the status of LED(s) at outputs Q3, Q2, Q1 and Q0.
144
Table 1 Up counter
Status of LEDs
D/ Clock
Pin No.5 input Pin No.11 D0 D1 D2 D3
Pin No.14
0 x 0 0 0 0
0 1 x x x x
0 1 x x x x
0 1 x x x x
0 1 x x x x
0 1 x x x x
0 1 x x x x
0 1 x x x x
0 1 x x x x
0 1 x x x x
Conclusion: _________________________________
TASK 3: Setting the decade counter to count-down mode and test
1 Feed D3, D2, D1 and D0 with 1001 (binary 9) by applying 4 Refer Table 2 and feed clock pulses at clock input (Pin
suitable voltage levels (logic-1=+5V and logic-0=0V). 14). On feeding each clock pulse record the output Q3,
2 Apply logic-0 to input (pin-11) momentarily and Q2, Q1 and Q0.
raise it back to logic-1 level. 5 From the recorded readings at step 4, conclude
This sets the outputs Q3, Q2, Q1 and Q0 to 1001 whether the counter is counting-up or counting-down.
such that this becomes the starting value for 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to recheck satisfactory working of
the down counter. the down-counter.
3 Apply logic-1 to D/U (Down/Up, pin 5) such that the 7 Get the working of the circuit and the recorded output
counter is prepared for count-down operation. checked by the Instructor.
Table 2-Down Counter

Status of LED(S)
D/ Clock
Pin No.5 input Pin No.11 D0 D1 D2 D3
Pin No.14
x x 1 0 0 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
Conclusion : _________________________________
Construct and test a multiplexer and Demultiplexer circuit using ICS

• construction and testing of 4 to 1 multiplexer circuit using IC 74LS151
• construction and testing of 1 to 4 demultiplexer circuit using IC 74LS138.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • IC 7432 IC base - 2 Nos

• Soldering iron 25W/230V - 1 No • Digital IC trainer kit with instruction
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set manual - 1 No
• Regulated DC power supply 0-30V/2A - 1 No • Resistor 330W/¼ W/CR25 - 6 Nos
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No • Bread board - 2 Nos
Materials • Hook up wires - as reqd
• Rosin cored solder - as reqd • Miniature SPDT toggle switch - 8 Nos
• IC-74LS151 - 1 No • Data sheet of IC 74LS151 - 1 No
• IC-74LS138 with data sheet - 1 No
Safety Precaution: Ensure that the IC pins are not bent while inserting into the bread board IC Base.
PROCEDURE
Note: If the digital IC trainer kit is not available in the lab,follow the steps given for this exercise
TASK 1 : Construction and testing of 4 to 1 multiplexer circuit using IC 74LS151
1 Collect the components required, check them and 2 Use toggle switches either in 5V position or in Zero Volt
assemble the multimeter circuit as shown in Fig 1 on position for different logic levels as shown in Table-1.
breadborad.
3 Get the assembled multiplexer circuit checked by the
Use the 16 pin IC base for IC74LS151. Instructor.
4 Switch ON the 5VDC supply to the circuit and operate
switches S1 to S4 for Data inputs and S5 & S6 for
selection Sequence.
5 Observe the LED for each setting and record it in
Table 1.
Note: When data input is not available,

multiplexer does not produce output for the
select condition.
6 Verify the output by keeping data input switches S1 to

S4 in 5VDC position and select S5 & S6 randomly.
7 Observe the LED and change Data input switches one
at a time for theLED to go OFF.
It confirms that input is selected and goes to the

output.
8 Repeat steps 6 & 7 with different combinations of S5 &

S6 and confirm the Data selected.
146
Table 1
DATA INPUTS (LOGIC LEVELS) SELECT SEQUENCE
Sl. D3 D2 D1 D0 B A LED OUTPUT

No. (Y)
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 D0-LED ON
2 0 0 1 0 0 1 D1-LED ON
3 0 1 0 0 1 0 D2-LED ON
4 1 0 0 0 1 1 D3-LED ON
5 1 1 1 1
TASK 2 : Construction and testing of 1 to 4 Demultiplexer circuit using IC74LS138
1 Collect all the components check them and assemble 4 Switch ON the 5VDC supply to the circuit, Keep S1 at
the demultiplexer as shown in Fig 1 on breadboard. + 5VDC for the data input high. Change the settings of
Use the 16 pin base for IC74LS138. switches S2 and S3 for different combination of Data
select sequence as shown in Table -1.
2 Connect the toggle switch at input as shown in the circuit
5 Observe the LEDs for each setting and record the status
3 Get the assembled circuit checked by the Instructor. in Table -1
Note: When data input is not available,
Demultiplexer does not produce output for that
condition in any of the Data output pins.
6 Verify the output by keeping the Data input switch S1
to ground, Select Switch S2 & S3 randomly.
7 Observe the LED, Change switches S2 & S3 to other
three combinations, for whether any of the LEDs to
glow.
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 by keeping the switch S1 at
+5VDC and confirm the LEDs are glowing independently
as per the selection sequence in Table -1.
Table 1
Sl. Selection Output channels(Pin Nos.) LED ON =1 Remarks
No. Sequence LED OFF = 0
A B Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3
pin 15 pin 14 pin 13 pin 12 LED LED LED LED
1
2
3
4
5
Identify and test common anode and common cathode

• test the common anode and common cathode by using multimeter.
Requirements
• Multimeter with probes - 1 No • Seven segment LED (common anode) - 1 No
• Seven segment LED (comon cathede) - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Testing the seven segment - LED display and identify the type
1 Collect the components from Instructor. Check the

7-seg display units by using multimeter.
2 Identify the given display whether it is common anode
(or) common cathode using data book.
3 Check each segment using multimeter in diode mode
as shown in Fig 1. (Each segment is an LED inside
when forward biased LED slows when reverse biased
LED does no glow). Refer to Fig 3 to know the com- 4 Multimeter +ve terminal is connected to common pin
mon terminal. and -ve tenimal is connected to all pins.
5 7 Segment pins are 10 numbers and 2 pins are com-
mon. 1 pin is dot (Details of Pin).
6 Repeat the checking procedure for the other type of
display.
148
Construct and test octal to binary encoder and decoder circuit using IC 74148
and IC 74132
• construct and test octal to binary encoder circuit using IC 74148
• construct and test binary to octal decoder circuit using IC 74132.
Requirements
• IC 74148 with data sheet - 1 Nos
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • IC 74132 with data sheet - 1 No
• RPS (0-30)V/2A - 1 No • 16 pin IC base - 2 Nos
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 Set • LED 5mm Red, green - 12 Nos
• Soldering iron 25W/230V - 1 No • Resistors Boar/1/4W - 10 Nos
• Digital IC trainer kit with • Hook up wires - as reqd
instruction manuel - 1 No • Bread board - 1 No
• Rosin cored solder - as reqd • Rosin cored solder - as reqd
• IC-74LS151 - 1 No
• IC-74LS138 with data sheet - 1 No
Note : If the digital IC trainer kit is not available in the tab follow the steps given for this exercise.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construct and test encoder circuit using IC74LS151
1 Collect the components required, check them and

assemble circuit as shown in Fig 1.
2 Get the assembled encoder circuit checked by the
instructor.
3 Switch ON the +5v dc supply to the circuit.
4 Operate the swithc So to S7 for data inputs and observe
the output LED for each setting Y0, Y1 & Y2.
5 Verify the 8 to 3 encoder truth table given in Table 1.
O - L - Low state
I - H - High state
149
Table 1
octal number Inputs Outputs
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Y0 Y1 Y2
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
4 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
5 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
6 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
TASK 2 : Construct and test decorder circuit using IC74138

1 Collect the components required, check them and
essential circuit as shown in Fig 2.
2 Get the assembled encoder circuit checked by the
instructor
3 Switch on the +5Vdc supply to the circuit
4 Operate the switch accordingly observe the output
LED for each setting
5. Verify 3- 8 decoder truth table given in table 2.
Table 1
Inputs Outputs
Enable Select
G1 G1 A0 A1 A2 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
X H X X X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
L X X X X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1/H D 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1/H D 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
1/H D 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1
1/H D 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
1/H D 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
1/H D 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
1/H D 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
1/H D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
X - Toggle state
H - High state
L - Low
Construct and test decimal to BCD encoder using IC 74147 and seven segment
LED display
• Construct and test decimal to BCD encoder using IC 74147 and seven segment LED display.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 1 set • Resistors 330/ 1/4w - 7 Nos
• IC 74147 with date sheet - 1 No • 10k - 10 Nos
• 16 pin IC base - 1 No • Hook up wires - as reqd.
• IC 7447 - 1 No • Bread board - 1 No
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No • Rosin cored solder - as reqd.
• Soldering iron 25w/ 230V - 1 No • LED 5mm Red, green - 4 Nos
• Digital IC trainer kit - 1 No • Switch ( push) - 10 Nos
• IC 7404 - 1 No
Note: if the digital IC trainer kit is not available in the lab follow the steps given for this exercise.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construct and test decimal to BCD encoder using IC 74147 and seven segment LED display
1 Collect the components required, check them and 4 Observe the decimal to BCD conversion for each
assemble circuit as shown in Fig 1. decimal numbers from 0 to 9 by pressing the switches.
2 Get the assembled circuit checked by the instructor 5 Verify the truth table given in table 1.
3 Switch on the +5v vcc supply to the circuit 6 Get the work checked by the instructor.
151
Truth table for 74LS147
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 BCD (neg : ogic)
E H H E E H H E E E H H E .... (010)
X X X X X X X X L L H H L .... (910)
X X X X X X X L E L H H E 0..0(8 10)
X X X X X X L E E E L L L 0... (710)
X X X X X L H E E E L L E .00.(6 10)
X X X X L H H E E E L H L .0.0(5 10)
X X X L E H H E E E L H E .0..(4 10)
X X L E E H H E E E H L L ..00(3 10)
X L H E E H H E E E H L E ..0.(2 10)
L H H E L H H E E E H H L ...0(110)
H = High voltage level L = Low voltage level X = don’t care
Construct and test seven segment LED Display decoder with IC 7447
• construction and testing of seven segment LED display decoder with IC 7447.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • IC base 14 pin - 2 Nos

• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • IC base 16 pin - 2 Nos
• DC power supply, 0-30V/2A - 1 No • 7-segment LED display FND507 - 2 Nos
• Logic probe - 1 No • Resistors 330W/¼W/CR25 - 7 Nos
• Logic probe - 1 No
Materials • Single shot logic pulser - 1 No
• IC-7490 - 2 Nos • General purpose IC TB/Bread board - 1 No
• IC-7447 - 2 Nos • Solder, flux - as reqd
• Connecting wires - as reqd
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construction and testing of a decade counter using IC7490

the decade counter using IC 7490 on the bread board
as shown in Fig 1.
Make use of IC base to connect IC7490
2 Reset the counter output by applying logical 1 input

momentarily to reset input pins 2 & 3.
3 Test and record the output logic levels in Table 1 using
logic probe.
4 Apply a clock pulse at Pin no.14 using single shot logic
pulser and note down the output logic levels in Table 1
at QA, QB, QC & QD using logic probe.
5 Repeat step 4 for different clock pulses and record the
153
Table 1 Testing of decade counter IC7490
Clock Output Decimal number displayed

input QD QC QB QA
0 (reset)
10
observations in the table.

Measure current flowing through a resistor and display it on LED module

• measure the voltage in simple circuit using LED module of DPM
• measure the current in simple circuit using LED module of DPM.
Requirements
Tools /Equipments/Instruments Materials

• DPM with LED display 0-250 mA - 1 No. • Breadboard - 1 No.
• DPM with LED display 0-50V - 1 No. • Resistor 500 W/2W -1N
• Regulated DC power supply - 1 No. • Hook up wires - as reqd.
0-30V/2A
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No.
Safety precaution
1 Avoid loose connections
PROCEDURE
1 Collect the components required and check them for

good working condition.
2 Make the simple test set-up of the circuit as shown in
Fig 1.
3 Switch ON the DC power supply, increase to 5VDC.
4 Measure the voltage of variable power supply output
and current through the load.
5 Record the observations in Table-1.
6 Increase the supply voltage in steps of 5V upto 25VDC
and repeat steps 4 and 5.
Table-1
SI Value of load resistor Voltage across load Current through the circuit
No. Resistor
155
Identify different parts, functions of different types of displays

• identify different parts and its function of LCD
• identify different parts and its function of CRT
• identify different parts and its function of Electro luminescent display
• identify different parts and its function of electro-phoretic image display
• identify different parts and its function of dot matrix display
• identify different parts and its function of liquid vapour display.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments - CRT
• Trainees tool kit - 1 set - Electro luminescent displays
• Multimeter/ DMM with probes - 1 No - Electro - paretic image display
- Liquid vapour display
Materials
- Dot matrix display
• Different types of display - each 1 No
- LCD
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identify different parts and its function of LCD

1 Identify the display and its parts (Fig 1).
3 Check with the instructor.
2 Write the parts name in table 1.
156
Table 1
Name of the display
and its function
Name of the parts 1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
5 10
TASK 2: Identify different parts and its function of CRT
1 Identify the display and its parts (Fig 2). 2 Write the parts name in table 2.
Table 2
Name of the display
and its function
Name of the parts 1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
TASK 3: Identify different parts and its functioning of Electro luminescent display
1 Identify the display and its parts (Fig 3)
Table 3
Name of the display
and its function
Name of the parts
TASK 4: Identify different parts and its functioning of Electro paretic image display
1 Identify the display and its parts.

Table 4
Name of the display
and its function
Name of the parts 1
2
3
4
5
TASK 5: Identify different parts and its functioning of dot matrix display
1 Identify the display and its parts. Table 5
2 Write the parts name in table 5. Name of the display
and its function
Type Fig 5a
Type Fig 5b
TASK 6: Identify different parts and its functioning of liquid vapour display
1 Identify the display and its parts.
Table 6
Name of the display

and its function
Name of the parts 1
2
3
4
5
Instrument Mechanic - A/D and D/A Converters
Identify different A/D and D/A IC’s, its function and specification
• Identify different A/D and D/A IC’s, its function and specification.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 1 set • Assorted ADC IC’s - 2 Nos
• ADC data book/ manual • Assorted DAC IC’s - 2 Nos
• DAC data book/ manual
PROCEDURE
1 Pick one of the IC’s from given assorted lot (Fig 1),
Fig 2
identify the IC number and record them in table 1.
2 Refer to the data book/ manual identify their
specifications and function and record in table 1.
Fig 1
Fig 3
Sl. No IC. No Specification
1. Resolution:
2. Accuracy:
3. Linearity:
4. Monotoricity: Fig 4
5. Conversion time:
6. Settling time:
7. Stability:
159
Construct and test a Binary weighted and R-2R Ladder type Digital- to- Analog
converters
• resister converter by using Op-Amp
• construct and test a digital to analog (D/A) Binary weighted
• assemble and test a digital to analog converter using R-2R ladder network using Op-Amp.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • IC LM741, ICDAC0808 - 1 No
• Regulated dual DC power supply • Data sheet of the ICs used - as reqd
0-30V/2A - 1 No • Resistor, carbon film 1k
• DC power supply 15V/500 mA - 1 No 10 kW/¼ W/CR25 - 16 Nos
• Digital multimeter with probe - 1 No • Breadboard - 1 No
• IC Base 8 pin - 1 No
• Hook up wire - as reqd
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construct and test a digital to analog (D/A) Binary weighted resistor converter by using Op-Amp
1 Remove the using R-2R ladder network wired in step 5
of Task 1 keeping op-amp circuit intact.
2 Replace the feedback resistor of op-amp circuit with 1K
resistor referring to Fig 2.
3 Adjust the output of op-amp to zero Volts by repeating
steps 2, 3 and 4 of Task 1.
4 Wire the remaining part of circuit using ICDA0808 by
referring to Fig 2.
At this stage, do not make connection between (pin 4)
DAC0808IC and op-amp circuit.
6 Apply 15V to the VCC’-15V to VEE and 2V to Vref pins of
DAC0808IC and op-amp circuit.
9 Calculate the theoretical value of analog output using
7 Set the current through pin 14 to 2mA by adjusting the formula for each set of digital inputs applied at D0 to D7
2.2K Potentiometer. and record the same in Table 2.
8 Apply different logic input levels at data input pins D0 10 Compare the theoretical and practical results of output
to D7 referring to Table 2 of O&T sheet and record the voltage.
corresponding analog output Voltage.
TASK 2: Construct and test D to A converter using R-2R ladder network

1 Collect all the components, check them; Refer Fig 1 and 4 Assemble the remaining part of R-2R ladder network on
assemble the op-amp circuit using IC741 with 8 pin IC bread board ensuring four terminal connections D0 to
base on bread board. D3 which are digital inputs.
2 Get the assembled circuit checked by the Instructor. 5 Use the toggle switches S0 to S3 and operate them to
provide logic levels low (GND) and thigh (1) as per the
3 Connect the dual DC power supply +15, -15V and GND
Table 1.
terminals to the IC741 referring to Fig 1.
160
D0.2o+D1.21+D2.22+D3.23
V0 =
23
Digital Input = logic 0/logic 1
Note: For (eg) If the 4 bit binary inuts are [D0 D1

D2 D3 - Decimal values = 7.
The equivalent analog value of the D to A converter can be

calculated as follows:
As logic - 2 refer to 5V, Vref = 5V in the circuit.
For the binary inputs 1110, the input voltage x at pin 2 of
Op - Amps, is

0 1 2 3
Vx = 4 [(2 x 1)+(2 x1) + (2 x1) + (2 x 0)]
7 Apply binary logic inputs at D0 to D3 as per Table 1, 2
measure voltage at the output of the Op-Amp and record
them in Table.
8 Repeat step 7 for different binary input combinations. Analog =
1
(7 ) = ⎛⎜ ⎞
7
⎟
16 ⎝ 16 ⎠
9 Calculate the theoretical Vo by using the formula for
different binary input combinations and record the 7
same in Table 1. O/P Vo = × 5V
16
Formula for theoretical output V0
For binary Input (-1111)2
Analog output will = -5V
Table 1
Decimal 4-bit Digital Input Vo Vo
Value of
Input D3 D2 D1 D0 Calculated Measured
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
(-1 is the inverting amplifier gain).

Construct and test Digital RAMP analog to digital converter (ADC) circuit)
• construct an analog to digital converter circuit using IC0809
• test and verify the analog to difital conversion circuit using IC0809.
Requirements
• IC ADC0809 - 1 No. • Trainees kit - 1 No.
• General purpose IC test board - 1 No. • DC power supply 0-5V/500 mA - 2 Nos.
• Toggle switch (miniature type) - 2 Nos • Pulse generator, 100kHz - 1 No.
• IC Base 28 pin - 1 No. • Voltmeter analog/digital 0-5V - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construct an analog to digital converter circuit using IC0809
1 Refer Fig 1 and wire the analog to digital converter 3 Apply a 100 KHZ square wave as clock input at pin
circuit on a general purpose IC test board using 28 pin no.10.
IC base.
4 Apply analog input to the input INO, as shown in Table
1 of O&T sheet.
5 Apply logic-1 input to output enable input (OE) using
switch 2.
6 Apply a start pulse using switch SW1 by throwing it from
logic-0 to logic-1 and back to logic-0.
7 Measure and record the digital output levels in the O&T
sheet.
8 Repeat steps 4 to 7 for different analog inputs referring
to the Table 1 of O&T sheet.
9 Calculate the theoretical value for each set of recorded
digital output using the formula.
Vth = Vref [D7.2-0 + D5.2-2 + D4.2-3 + D3.2-4 + D2.2-5 + D1.2-6 +
D 0. 2-7]
10 Compare both the actual analog input voltage applied
Vin and the calculated theoretical analog voltage Vth.in.
2 Insert the IC and apply +5V to VCC +Vref and OV to
Vref to the circuit constructed. 11 Get the work checked by your instructor.
TASK 2: Select and transmit one bit of data and route the same to a desired output line
1 Apply different data inputs to be transmitted from 4 Check and record the logic level routed to one of the
multiplexer at Data input pins D0 to D7. output lines of the demultiplexer.
2 Select the data input applied at D0 by setting a proper Note that the selected data applied at the input of
address using select input switches connected at C, B multiplexer is transmitted and routed to one of the output
and A of multiplexer IC 74LS151. lines of demultiplexer.
3 Check and record the logic level being transmitted from 5 Repeat the steps 2 to 4 by changing the select input
the output line of the multiplexer. switch positions to select different data inputs for
Note that the selected data input appears at the output transmission and routing to output of demultiplexer.
line of multiplexer.
162
Performing the interfacing of IEEE 488.2 standard with a single controller

• connect the interfacing of IEEE 488.2 standard with a single controller can control upto 15 different
• instrument connected stat topology.
Requirements
• Personal computer with GPIB • Measuring devices - any Nos
software - 1 No • Recording devices - 5 Nos
• GPIB IEEE - 488 cableWith • Trainees tool kit - 1 set
IEEE - 488.2 protocol - As reqd.
PROCEDURE
1 Identify the pin detail of GPIB connector (Fig 1, Fig 2 Fig 3

& Fig 3)
Table 8.1 GPIB pins and signals
Pin Label Signal name Pin Label Signal name

1 DIO1 Data 13 DIO5 Data
5 EOI End or identify 17 REN Remote enabale
6 DAV Data valid 18 GND Twisted-pair ground with DAV
7 NRFD Not ready fordata 19 GND Twisted-pair ground with NRFD
8 NDAC Not data accepted 20 GND Twisted-pair ground with NDAC
9 IFC Interface clear 21 GND Twisted-pair ground with IFC
10 SRQ Service request 22 GND Twisted-pair ground with SRQ
11 ATN Attention 23 GND Twisted-pair ground with ATN
12 Shield Chassis ground 24 GND Signal ground
163
2 Check the GPIB connectivity in measuring recording
devices
Note: if GPIB provision not available use adopter
as shown in Fig 4.
3 Connect the measuring/ recording devices as shown

in Fig 5.
4 Check the connections with the instructor
5 Practice the interfacing of IEEE 488.2 standard with
a single controller to control of 15 different devices.
Electronics & Hardware Exercise 2.5.240-242
Identify different pins signal of RS 232 perform interfacing of RS 232 to PC and

convert RS 485 signals to RS 232 signals using RS 485 to RS 232 convertor
• identify different pins signal and source of RS 232
• perform interfacing of RS 232 to PC
• convert RS 485 signals to RS 232 signals using RS 485 to RS 232 convertor.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • RS 232 to RS 485 convertor - 1 No
• RS 232 connector (9 pin) - 1 No • RS 485 to RS 232 convertor - 1 No
• RS 232 connector (25 pin) - 1 No • Screw driver set - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identify different pins signal and source of RS 232

1 Identify the RS 232 connector (male or female). 2 Fill the pin detail in space given in table 1 & table 2.
Table 1 Table 2
Pin no RS 232 male RS 232 Female Pin no RS 232 male RS 232 female
Pin 1 Pin 1
Pin 2 Pin 2
Pin 3 Pin 3
Pin 4 Pin 4
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 6 Pin 6
Pin 7 Pin 7
Pin 8 Pin 8
Pin 9 Pin 9
165
Table 3
Pin no RS 232 male RS 232 female
110
25
TASK 2: Perform interfacing of RS 232 to PC
1 Connect RS 232 to RS 485 convertor in Fig 1 of task.

Fig 1
2 Convert the RS 232 signals to Rs 485 signals using
RS 232 to RS 485 convertor in task 2 exercise.
3 Observe the output.
4 Connect DAQ (Date Acquisition unit) to PC through
RS 232 connector as shown in Fig 3 connect
transducer signal.
6 Output to DAQ.
TASK 3: Convert RS232 signals o RS485 signals using RS232 to RS485 converter
Fig 1 Fig
Fig52
166 Electronics & Hardware: Instrument Mechanic (NSQF Level - 5) - Exercise 2.5.240-242
Instrument Mechanic - Digital meters and CRO
Identify different parts, of digital meters and CRO

• Identify different parts, function and operation of digital frequency meter
• Identify different parts, function and operation of digital phase measuring meter
• Identify different parts, function and operation of digital time measuring meter
• Identify different parts, function and operation of digital capacitance meter.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Digital capacitance

• Trainees tool kit - 1 No • Screw driver set - 1 No
• Digital frequency meter Materials
• Digital phare measuring meter
• Digital time measuring meter (Timer) • Connecting wires - as reqd.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: identify different parts, function and operation of digital frequency meter
1 Take digital frequency meter (Fig 1). 4 Connect measure and the frequency.
5 Fill the block diagram shown in Fig 2.
Fig 1
2 Dismantle digital frequency meter with the help of

screw driver.
3 Identify the parts of the meter with the help of
instrumented record.
TASK 2: identify different parts, function and operation of digital phase measuring meter
1 Take digital phase measuring meter (Fig 3). Fig 3
2 Dismantle digital phase measuring meter with the help

of screw driver.
instructor.
4 Connect, measure and record the phase angle.
5 Fill the block diagram as shown in Fig 4.
167
TASK 3: identify different parts, function and operation of digital time measuring instrument
1 Take digital time measuring instrument (timer)
(Fig 5).
Fig 5
2 Dismantle digital timer with the help of screw driver.

4 Connect, measure and record the time.
instructor. 5 Fill the block diagram as shown in Fig 6.
TASK 4: identify different parts, function and operation of digital capacitance meter
1 Take digital capacitance meter (Fig 7).
Fig 7
2 Dismantle digital capacitance meter with the help of

screw driver.
instructor.
4 Connect, measure and record the capacitance.
5 Fill the block diagram as shown in Fig 8.
Identify LED display module and its decoder/driver ICs

• identify the type of LED display used in the Digital Panel Meter
• identify various decoder/driver IC in digital panel meter.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Digital Multimeter with probes - 1 No.
• Digital panel meter with Materials
different driver ICs - as reqd.
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set. • Operating / Instruction manual
Safety precaution 2 Use proper tools for opening the Digital

1 Keep the work area dry and clean. Panel Meter.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Identification of the type of LED display

1 Pick any one of the labelled digital panel meter from 3 Check the display type (LCD, LED, Dot matrix, etc.)
the instructor and note down in Table-1.
2 Note down the name plate details of the digital panel 4 Repeat the above steps for all other digital panel meter.
meter as shown in Fig 1.
TASK 2 : Identification of the Decoder/Driver IC in Digital Panel Meter

1 Pick any one of the labelled digital panel meter from the 3 Remove the circuit board in DPM cabinet.
instructor
4 Identify the Decoder/Driver IC and record in Table by
2 Remove the back panel in the DPM. referring the block diagaram fig 2.
5 Repeat the above steps for all the panel meters.
169
Table 1
Label Name plate details of DPM Display type Display colour Decoder/Driver IC
No.
Display a word on a two line LED

• construct a two line LED circuit
• Test the two line LED circuit.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Transistor, SL100 - 2 Nos.

• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set. • Transistor, TIP 122 with heat sink - 1 No.
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 Set. • Capacitor, 10 F, 16V - 1 No.
• Regulator DC Power supply • Capacitor, 0.1 F - 1 No.
0-30V/ 2A - 1 No. • Capacitor, 0.01 F - 1 No.
• Soldering iron 25W/230V - 1 No. • Pre-set, 100K (Horizontal type) - 1 No.
• Resistor, 10K , 0.5W - 1 No.
Materials • Resistor, 470 , 0.5W - 3 Nos.
• Breadboard/PCB-GP - 1 No. • Resistor, 220 , 0.5W - 5 Nos.
• Decade counter IC CD4017 - 1 No. • LED, 5mm, Red - 43 Nos.
• Timer IC 555 - 1 No. • Connecting wires - as reqd.
• Positive regulator IC 7805 - 1 No. • Hookup wire - as reqd.
• Diode, IN5402 - 2 Nos. • Rosin cored solder - as reqd.
• Diode, IN4148 - 2 Nos.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construction of a two line LED circuit to display a word

1 Collect all the components required and test them for The arrangement of LED1 through LED5 is
good working condition. used to display ‘I’ as shown in Fig.1. The anodes
Use heat sink for the power transistor T3 of LED1 through LED5 are connected to point-
A and the cathodes of these LEDs are connected
2 Plan the layout and assemble the circuit as shown in to point-B. Similarly, connect the other letters
Fig 1 on the breadboard/ general purpose PCB. as shown in Fig.1.
3. Get the assembled circuit checked by the Instructor.
TASK 2: Testing the two line LED circuit
1 Apply 230V, 50Hz, single phase AC supply to the

primary of the transformer. 4 Adjust the pre-set VR of astable multivibrator to change
the clock frequency of decade counter to vary the
2 Switch ON the 9V DC power supply and check the display time.
circuit operation.
5 Observe the display output for the time/sequence of
3 Observe the output LED display cycle. LED letters.
The display board displays ‘ITI,’ and ‘EM’ one
after another for one second each. After that,
the message “ITI EM” is displayed for 4 seconds
(because Q5 and Q6 are connected to resistor
R4 via diodes D5 and D6).
At the next clock input output Q9 goes high, and
IC3 is reset and the display is turned off for one
second. Thereafter the cycle repeats.
171
Measure current flowing through sensor and display it on LED Module

• measure the current flowing through the digital panel meter.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 2 Nos • Shunt resistor 0.1 W - 1 No.
• Multimeter with probes - 1 No. • Shunt resitor 0.01 W - 1 No.
• Regulator power supply 0-30V/2A - 1 No.
• Rectangular battery 9V - 1 No.
Safety precaution 2 Usse proper tools for opening the digital

1 Keep the work area dry and clean. panel meter.
PROCEDURE
1 Connect the shunt resistor to digital panel/meter as 4 Connect the battery to circuit as shown in the dia-
shown in the Fig 1. gram.
5 Connect the Pin No.3 to Pin No.6 of DPM for proper
decimal point display.
6 Note that the current value displayed on the meter
can be fine-tuned by adjusting the trimmer potentiom-
eter on the back of the DPM.
7 Short Pin No.8 and pin No.10 together and connected
to the negative end of the shunt resistor.
8 Connect Rshunt across Pin No.7 and Pin No.8 and will
be connected in series with the load .
9 Note down the actual and indicated current readings
and record in Table-1.
Calculation
• All digital panel meters, the full scale deflection are
200 mV full- scale.
• For the measurement of 1 Amps current through DPM,
correct power rating of the shunt resistor can be de-
termined by using the Ohm’s Law power formula.
2 The shunt resistor is placed in series with the applied P (Power) = V (Voltage) x I (Current)
current which causes a voltage deop to occur across P = Vmax x Imax = (0.200) x (1.0) = 0.1 Watt
the shunt.
• So we should use a 1/2 watt 1% resistor to be safe.
3 The shunt value depends on the maximum current flow
that will be encountered. For relatively small current
values (below 1 Amp) a 0.1 ohm shunt resistor is ad-
equate. This value will minimise any loading in the
circuit but will procedure a reasonable reading on the
DPM. If higher current levels will be encountered, 0.01
ohm or lower value should be used.
173
Practice on measuring instruments in single and three phase circuits

• measuring phase sequence of a three phase supply using phase sequency meter
• measuring frequency of using frequency meter.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Measuring phase sequence of a three phase supply using phase sequences meter
1 Read the marking on the phase sequence indicator 5 If the rotation is opposite, switch off the supply and
and record the direction for - RYB sequence interchange the leads II & III connected to the terminals
- RBY sequence Y and B. Switch on the supply.
PHASE SEQUENCE 6 Now the disc will rotate in the direction of the arrow.
In the direction of arrow on disc:________________ 7 Mark the leads corresponding to the letters on the
phase sequence indicator.
Opposite to the direction of
Do not touch the capacitor terminals with your bare
arrow on disc:_______________________________ hands. Use insulated pliers. The capacitor might hold
2 Switch OFF the supply and connect the 3 phases of the electrical charge and might give a shock.
supply to the sequence indicator. (Fig 1) 8 Switch on the main supply and observe the deflection
Mark the leads as I, II, III. connect them, such that I is of the meters.
connected to R, II to Y, III to B. 9 Record the meter readings in Table 2 for the load
You can connect andy lead (phase) to any conditions as shown in Table 2.
terminal in the sequence indicator. 10 Switch ‘off’ the power supply.
3 Switch ON the supply and observe the direction of the 11 Calculate the power factor in each case applying the
disc movement. following formulae.
4 Record the direction by a tick mark. a) P.F. calculated 1 = Cos = W1 + W2
Rotation 3 X Eph X Iph
Same as the arrow on disc b) P.F. calculated 2 = Cos where the angle is derived
Opposite to the arrow on disc from the formula Tan W1 + W2
W1 + W2
12 Enter the values in the appropriate column Table 2.
13 Determine the percentage error in both cases and
draw the graph.
%error = (Calculated P.F - Measured P.F) X 100
Calculated P.F
14 Write your conclusion summarising the reasons for
the error.
Observation:
______________________________________________
______________________________________________
______________________________________________
174
TABLE 2
Condition A m m e t e r Voltmeter 3 - p h a s e Wattmeter Wattmeter 3 - p h a s e P.F calculated 1 Cos P.F calculated 2 P.F measured Percentage
reading IPH reading EPH apparent power r e a d i n g reading W2 true power error
in volt amperes 3 W1 watts watts W1 + W2 P.F.
x EPH x IPH
Motor with
out load
Motor with
load
Motor with
load with
capacitor
Electronics & Hardware: Instrument Mechanic (NSQF Level - 5) - Exercise 2.6.247

175
TASK 2: Measuring frequency using frequency meter
1 Identify and electrical resonance type frequency

meter.
2 Identify the terminals and their voltage ratings.
The frequency meter will have two ranges 250
V and 440 volts.
3 Connect flexible leads to the meter terminals for 440
volts.
4 Connect the frequency meter between the two phases
of the three-phase supply lines as in Fig 1.
Do not connect the frequency meter between

phases as the meter range is only 250 volts. Any
how there will not be any difference in frequency
of supply either when you connect the frequency
meter across the lines or the phase and neutral.
Table 1
SI.No. Frequency Measured Frequency

measured by resonance type
between meter
Whenever you connect the frequency meter,
remember to switch ‘off’ the supply. 1 L1 - L 2
5 Get the connect by the instructor. 2 L1 - L 3
6 Switch ‘ON’ the power supply and note down the 3 L2 - L 3
frequency in Table 1.
4 L1 - N
7 Repeat the procedure for measure frequency between
the other phases (i.e. L1 - L3 and L2 - L3). 5 L2 - N
8 Switch ‘OFF’ the power supply. 6 L3 - N
9 Change the load connections of the frequency meter 11 Switch ‘ON’ the power read and record the supply
to 250V range. frequency in Table 1.
10 Connect the frequency meter between one phase line 12 Repeat the procedure for measuring frequency between
(i.e.L1) and neutral as in Fig 2. the other phases and neutral and enter values in
Table 1.
Identify the different capacitors and measure capacitance of various capacitors

using LCR meters
• identify different types of capacitors by their physical appearance
• determine the capacitance value by typographic codes.
Requirements
Materials
• Trainees Tool Kit - 1 Set • Assorted types and values of
• DC Regulated Power Supply, 0-30V/2A - 1 No different types of capacitors - 10 Nos
• Digital LCR Meter with manual - 1 No • Cotton cloth/cleaning brush - 1/4 kg
• Ohm meter - 1 No
• Electrician Knife - 1 No
PROCEDURE
The instructor has to label the different types of 4 Prepare LCR meter and connect a capacitor, observe
capacitors used for this exercise. and measure the capacitor value and record in
1 Pick one of the labelled capacitor from the given lot. Table 1.
2 Identify the type name and record it in Table 1. 5 Repeat steps-2 to 4 for remaining capacitors and
record in Table 1.
3 Refer the typographic code chart (Fig 1) for capacitors.
Observe and record the Capacitance value of the 6 Get the work checked by the Instructor
capacitor.
Table 1
Label No. Type of Capacitor Capacitor Capacitor Capacitor value by measuring
value code value LCR meter
1
2
3
4
Capacitor Conversion Values
Microfarads ( F) Nanofarads (nF) Picofarads (pF)
0.000001 F 0.001 nF 1 pF
0.00001 F 0.01 nF 10 pF
0.0001 F 0.1 nF 100 pF
0.001 F 1 nF 1,000 pF
0.01 F 10 nF 10,000 pF
0.1 F 100 nF 100,000 pF
1 F 1,000 nF 1,000,000 pF
10 F 10,000 nF 10,000,000 pF
Max.Operating voltage
Tolerance Code Percentage Code Max.Voltage
Code Percentage G ±2% 1H 50V

H ±3% 2A 100V
B ±0.1 pF 2T 150V
J ±5%
C ±0.25 pF 2D 200V
K ±10%
D ±0.5 pF 2E 250V
M ±20%
F ±1% 2G 400V
Z ±80%, - 20%
177
Practice on time measuring instrument to measure the time in different electrical

control circuits
• identify the terminals of the timer relay
• test and verify the operation of the timer Relay.
Requirements
• Trainees Tool Kit - 1 Set • Hook-up wire -5m
• Regulated DC Power Supply, 0-30V/2A - 1 No • Bulb, 230V/40W - 1 No
• Multimeter with probes - 1 No • Power Cord - 1 No
• Timer Relay 12V DC - 1 No • SPST Switch/1A - 2 Nos
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identification of terminals of the Timer Relay

1 Collect the timer relays along with the instruction
booklet.
2 Inspect and determine the terminal connection of the
coil and the number of contacts.
3 Identify the normally open and closed contacts by using
Ohmmeter/Multimeter.
4 Record the relay and contact terminal number.
5 Draw the connection diagram of the relay in the record.
6 Measure the coil resistance and record.
TASK 2: Test, measure and verify the operation of the timer relay
1 Connect the timer relay control and power circuit 3 Set the time of the timer relay to 1 minute.
connection as per the circuit diagram shown in Fig 2.
4 Switch ON the SPST Switch 'S1' and check the control
circuit operation of the relay.
5 Give 230V/50Hz/AC power supply to the power circuit
and Switch ON the SPST switch S2.
6 Note down the delay time in the Table-1 and observe the
bulb condition.
2 Note down the coil supply of the timer relay in the

Table-1 and set the DC power supply voltage accordingly.
Table 1
Coil Supply Timer setting Delay Time Measured
178
Identify the different controls on the CRO front panel and observe the function
of each control
• identify operating controls on the CRO front Panel
• observe the function of each front panel control.
Requirements
• 0-20 MHz Dual channel CRO-with
probe kit and operating manual - 1 Set
Note: The instructor has to take the xerox copy Provide the operating manual of the CRO to
of front panel of CRO available in the lab; mark refer the function of each control.
serial numbers for each control and issue to
tainees.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identification of operator controls on the CRO front panel

1 Keep the CRO on the work bench; observe the name 3 Refer to the operating manual and note down the
of controls printed on each of them on the panel. functions in Table 1.
2 Refer to the serial numbers marked on the xerox copy 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all controls on the CRO front
for each control from power ON/OFF, note down the panel.
name in the Table 1.
Fig 1
179
Table I
Label No. Name of the Front Panel Controls Remarks
10
12
13
14
15
5 Get the work checked by the instructor
TASK 2 : Observation of function of each front panel control in CRO

1 Connect the power cord to the CRO and plug it to AC 10 Record the observations in Table 2.
mains supply.
Table 2
2 Switch ‘ON’ and allow warm up time till the trace appears
on the screen. Sl. Name of the Effect of
No. control display on
3 Adjust intensity and focus controls for a observing screen
effect of size and brightness of trace on the screen,
record observation in Table 2. 1 POWER - ON/OFF
4 Re adjust the above controls for a sharp trace on the 2 Intensity

screen.
3 Focus
5 Adjust time/Div control, observe the effect of trace
movement and bring back to the previous setting; 4 Time/Div
record observations in Table 2.
5 Horizontal position
6 Adjust horizontal position control, observe the shifting
of the trace, bring back to the previous setting; record 6 Vertical position Ch-1
7 Vertical position Ch-2
7 Repeat the step 6 for vertical position control and
record observations in Table 2. 8 Trigger Int./Ext.
8 Connect the output of built in calibration signal to the 11 Repeat the steps for remaining controls and record
channel 1 input using suitable cable/CRO probe. observations.
9 Observe the waveform, vary the settings of above 12 Get the work checked by the Instructor.
controls one at a time and observe the effect on the
display.
Measure VDC, VAC, time period using CRO sine wave Parameters
• measure D.C. voltage (VDC)
• measure the values of AC voltage (VP-P)
• measure the time period of a sine wave parameters.
Requirements
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Step-down transformer, 230V/12V,
• Oscilloscope, 20MHz - 1 No 200 mA - 1 No
• RPS, 0-30V, 1A - 1 No • Probes for Oscilloscope - 1 No
• Voltmeter/Multimeter - 1 No • Dry cell, 1.5 V - 1 No
• Hook-up wire -1m
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Measurement of DC voltage

1 To measure the voltage of the dry cell, set the volt per 4 The magnitude of the EMF of the cell is given by,
division to 0.5 V/Div.
5 Now, reverse the leads, the trace will move down by 3
2 Connect the black (ground) probes to the negative end divisions indicating the voltage is negative and again the
and the red probe to the positive end of the dry cell. EMF of the cell = 3 x 0.5 = -1.5V.
3 Observe the trace on the screen. It will be observed that 6 Instead of a dry cell use the regulated DC power supply
the trace will move up by 3 divisions from the center line (0-30V) and repeat steps-2 to step-4 and record the
indicating the voltage in positive. observations in Table 1.
Table 1
Sl No. Power supply Attenuator No.of No.of Voltage
voltage in volt position divisions divisions measured
moved up moved down in CRO
1
2
Fig 1
181
TASK 2: Measurement of AC voltage
1 To measure AC voltages, set the AC-DC switch in (out) 6 Observe the wave form that appears on the screen.
AC position.
7 Increase the vertical sensitivity by the Volts/Div switch
2 Set the volt per division to 50V, if the input voltage is such that the wave form display is clearly seen.
unknown and adjust the time base switch to 10
milliseconds. 8 Measure the peak to peak voltage of the displayed
waveform, by counting the number of divisions between
3 Connect a step-down transformer secondary leads one positive and negative peaks. Record the observations
to the common input terminal to the ground side for in Table 2.
signal source and another lead to the input terminal.
9 Determine the RMS value of the voltage by measuring
4 Switch ON the oscilloscope, adjust the trace to center the voltage across the secondary of the transformer
and focus intensity controls for a sharp bright trace. using multimeter.
5 Switch ON and energize the primary of the transformer.
Table 2
Sl No. Attenuator No.of No.of Peak Peak to RMS
switch range divisions divisions voltage peak voltage
Volts/Div counted counted voltage (measured
peak peak to peak by
voltage voltage voltmeter)
Fig 2
TASK 3 : Measurement of time period and frequency of sine wave

1 After measurement of peak to peak voltage in Task 2, Where, T is the time period in seconds. Enter the values
turn the time base vernier (1) to CAL position. in Table 3.
2 Set the Time/Div switch to a range where the signal can 5 Formula to be used:
be clearly seen.
Time period (T) = Time base range x No. of divisions/
3 Count the number of divisions horizontally for one Cycles.
complete cycle and record the same in Table 3.
Frequency (f) = 1/T Hertz.
4 Calculate the frequency of the displayed wave form the
using formula,
Table 3
Sl No. Attenuator switch range No.of divisions Time Frequency f=1/T
Time/Div per cycle period (T) Hertz
Take a print of a signal from DSO by connecting a printer and tally with
applied signal
• connect a printer to a DSO and print the screen data
• connect a computer to a DSO and save the screen data
• connect a USB flash device and save the screen data
• recall the saved data from the USB flash drive.
Requirements
• DSO - 1 No. • IC -555 - 1 No.
• Manual - 1 No. • Resistor W/CR25 - 1 No.
• Analog trainer kit - 1 Set • 47 k - 1 No.
• Signal generator - 1 No. • 68 k - 1 No.
• Power supply 0-30 V/2A - 1 No. • 330 - 1 No.
• Diode 1N 4007 - 1 No.
• Capacitor
• 0.01 F - 2 Nos.
• 10 F - 1 No.
• LED - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Connect a printer to a DSO and print the screen data

1 Assemble an analog circuit using the analog trainer
kit. E.g assemble a astable multivibrator circuit as
shown in Fig 1.
2 Connect a power supply to the circuit and switch on
the power supply and connect the output to the DSO.
3 Switch on the Digital storage oscilloscope
4 Press AUTOSET
5 Connect the printer using a USB cable to the rear
panel of the DSO
6 Select the UTILITY ® OPTIONS ® Rear USB Port
® Printer® Printer setup
7 Push the option button labeled PRINT Button to select
prints. The oscilloscope takes a snapshot of the screen
and begins to send the image to the printer.
TASK 2: Connect a computer to a DSO and save the screen data

1 Repeat the steps from 1 to 4 of task 1
4 Push the option button labeled PRINT Button to save
2 Connect the computer using a USB cable to the rear the image. The oscilloscope takes a snapshot of the
panel of the DSO screen and begins to send the image to the computer.
3 Select the UTILITY ® OPTIONS ® Rear USB Port
® computer ® Printer setup
183
TASK 3: Save a screen data in a USB flash drive
1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 of task 1. 6 Push <select Folder> to set a different folder as the
2 Connect a USB flash drive to the DSO on the front current folder, if you desire to store at different folder.
panel. The oscilloscope will create a new folder within the
current folder with and automatically generated name.
You can use the PRINT button or the SAVE/RECALL every time you much push the print button.
menu Save Image Action option to save the current
screen image to a file on a USB flash drive, the PRINT 7 Access the screen you want to save.
button is more versatile than the option button , because 8 Push the Print button, the oscilloscope creates screen
it can be used with any menu. image in the new folder, with automatically generates
3 Press SAVE/RECALL menu button. file names.
4 Push the action button to select Save all. 9 To see al list of the files created by Save All To Files,
use < File Utilities>.
5 Push the option button labeled Print button to select
saves all to files. The save LED near the print button lights, to
indicate that pushing the button will save the
data to USB flash drive.
TASK 4: To recall a setup from a USB flash drive

• Check that a USB flash drive is inserted in the
oscilloscope Help System
• Push the SAVE/RECALL menu button The oscilloscope has a Help system with topics
that cover all the features of the oscilloscope.
• Push the Action option button to select Recall setup You can use the Help system to display several
• Push the Recall From option button to display the kinds of information:
Recall setup menu General information about understanding and
• Use the multipurpose knob to select a file or folder using the oscilloscope, such as Using the Menu
System.
• If desired, use the Change folder option button to
navigate to a different folder Information about specific menus and controls,
such as the Vertical Position Control.
• Push the Recall option button, This causes the
oscilloscope to recall the selected setup from the USB Advice about problems you may face while
flash drive and change to the recalled settings. using an oscilloscope, such as Reducing Noise.
Note: If the analog trainer kit is not available. Push the Exit option button or any menu button
The above circuit or any amplifier or oscillator to remove the Help text from the screen and
circuit may be constructed using discrete return to displaying waveforms.
components and the waveforms may be printed
or saved.
Identify different types of CRO probes used to measure the signals

• Identify different types of CRO probes.
Requirements
• different types of CRO probes - as reqd.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: identify different types of CRO probes

1 Identify and write the name of the CRO probe in Table 1.
Sl No. Picture of different types of probe Name of the probe type
185
Instrument Mechanic - Computes
Identify different parts of PC, CPU and familiar with different CPU operation
• identify PC components & devices
• identify different parts, its fuction and operation
• familiar with different CPU operation.
Among the three identical PC's, one PC will be used for demonstration by the instructor where as the
other two will be used by two groups of trainees.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: To identify various input/output devices of cnnected to the computer

1 Instructor will show the different input/output devices (available in your lab) connected to the computer and the
trainees will make a record of it in Table 1. (Fig 1)
Table 1
SI. No. Name of the I/P and O/P devices
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
186
TASK 2: Dismantle and identify the internal parts of a CPU
The instructor will open the system unit (available in your lab )and show the parts of system unit and
motherboard components as shown in Fig 2 & Fig 3 and the trainees will make a record of the parts in
Table 2 & 3.
Fig 2
Table 2
Sl.No. Name the parts of System Unit

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig 3
Table 5
SI. No. Name the parts of Mother board
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
TASK 3: Familiar with different CPU operation
The instructor will demonstrate the uses of the Fig 5
following indicators, switches controls (Fig 2)
and ports external to the processor found on
the system unit shown in (Fig 3) and the
trainees will make a record of it in table and
Table.
Fig 4
Table 4
SI.NO. Name the parts on the CPU Front panel

1
2
Table 4 3
SI.NO. Name the parts on the CPU Front panel 4
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
5 9
6 10
7 11
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Instrument Mechanic - Computers
Practice on windows interface and navigating windows

• invoke and close application from Start Menu
• invoke/close application from shortcut icon on the desktop and close using file menu
• open multiple applications and close using system menu
• arrange icons and windows on the desktop
• resize, move and arrange windows
• create shortcut icon on the desktop.
Requirements
• different types of CRO probes - as reqd.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Invoke and close application from Start Menu

1 Boot the computer with windows (After booting A pop-up menu will be displayed as shown in
Windows desktop appears). Fig 1.
2 Identify and record the icons, start button, task bar 6 Move the mouse pointer over the option in the popped
seen on the desktop. up menu to highlight it.
3 Record the system time at the right end corner of the A cascading menu which contains list of
task bar. executable programs and / or executable
program groups gets popped up as shown in
Fig 2.
Fig 1 Sub menu exists only for items which have got
arrow at the end, as shown in the following
figure.
Fig 2
The instructor should explain the components

of windows desktop.
5 Move the mouse pointer over the button and click on
it.
190
7 Move the mouse pointer over the microsoft Office, a While moving the mouse pointer from Microsoft
cascading menu will be appeared as shown in Fig 3. Office to MSOffice work 2007. First move
horizontally up to the next cascading menu and
then move vertically to place the mouse pointer
on MSOffice 2007.
Fig 3
8 Move the mouse pointer on that menu over the microsoft

Office Word 2007 as shown in Fig 3 and click on it. Fig 4
This starts Microsoft Word applications and

spreads on the screen.
9 Record the displayed Window title seen at the top of
the window title bar as shown in the Fig 4. If the application is already spread over the full
screen or maximized even before performing
10 Click on maximize button found at the top right corner previous step,practice restoring by clicking
of the window title bar as shown in Fig 4. onbutton and then maximize by clicking on
maximize button.
11 Click on the minimize the opened Microsoft work 12 Click on the minimized Microsoft word application
application and check for the presence of Microsoft found at the taskbar to activate and maximize the
word button on the taskbar. application.
Minimized applications reside at the taskbar as This restores the application and spred it on
shown in Fig 5. the desktop.
Fig 5 13 Click on the close button found at the top right corner
(control box) of the spread application to Close/Exit
Microsoft word application.
14 Repeat all the previous steps and practice to open,
maximize, restore, minimize and close a different
executable program (say Microsoft Excel) Instead of
Microsoft word.
TASK 2: Invoke/close application from shortcut icon on the Desktop and close using file menu
1 Move the mouse pointer over Microsoft word shortcut
Fig 6
icon and double click on the icon in the Windows
desktop.
This invokes the Microsoft word application and the
opened application spread on the screen. This is
another way of invoking an application other than
selecting from the Start menu.
2 Move the mouse pointer over the File menu and click
once in the menu bar.
A pulls down the File menu list will appear as shown in
Fig 6.
3 Move the mouse pointer over the menu item Exit in
the File menu list and click to close and exit the
Microsoft word application.
This is an alternative method of closing an application
in addition to the methods like, using Close button
and choosing close from the system menu.
4 Open Microsoft Excel and close it by choosing Exit
from the file menu as practiced in steps from 1 to 3.
5 Repeat step 1 to 4 for Microsoft PowerPoint
application.
6 Ask the instructor to check your progress before
practicing the next task.
TASK 3: Open multiple applications, and close using system menu

1 Open Microsoft Word application and make the size 3 Make the size of the Microsoft Excel application less
of the application less than the full size of the screen than the full size of the screen by clicking on the
by clicking the Restore button. Restore button.
This restores the microsoft word application 4 Minimize Microsoft Excel application by clicking on
window size to less than full screen, Now the the minimize button.
restore button changes to maximize button.
This minimizes the Excel appliction and places
2 Open and spread on the screen, open another it in the taskbar as an inactive application. Now
application say Microsoft Excel by Clicking on with only the Word application is seen on the screen
the Microsoft Word office Excel 2007. and is active.
Start All Programs Microsoft Office 5 Change the active application from Microsoft Word to
Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Excel by clicking on the Microsoft Excel button (icon)
found at the taskbar.
This makes the Word application inactive and Fig 7
places it as button at the taskbar.
6 Minimize Excel application and make the Microsoft
Word as the active application.
7 Right click on the plain area of the title bar of the word
application.
This pulls down a menu referred to as the System
(Control) menu as shown in Fig 7.
8 Select Close from the system menu and click on the
close and exit from Microsoft Word application.
Note that this is another way of closing and exiting
from active applications in addition to closing by
clicking on the buttion practiced earlier in this exercise.
When once the Word is closed, Microsoft Excel which
was till then inactive and residing at the taskbar
becomes active and spreads on the screen.
10 Check and record the application if any, residing at
9 Repeat step 8 and close/exit from Microsoft Excel the taskbar.
application.
TASK 4: Arrange Icons and Windows on the Desk Top

1 Move the mouse pointer over the My computer icon.
Fig 9
Click & hold the left mouse button, move the cursor to
approximately the center of the screen and release
the mouse button.
This drags the My computer icon and places it
in the new position on the desktop.
2 Repeat step 1 to drag and place Microsoft Word icon
just below the newly placed My computer icon.
3 Repeat step 1 to placle a few other icons as shown in
Fig 8 on the desktop.
Fig 8
5 Move the mouse pointer over the menu item in the

displayed list, a cascading menu will be displayed as
shown in Fig 10.
Fig 10
4 Move the mouse pointer on the desktop where there

is no icon and click the right mouse button.
A pulls down a context menu will appear as
shown in Fig 9.
The cascading menu lists different ways of Fig 11
arranging icons on the desktop.
6 Click on menu item from the displayed cascading
menu Name and observe the icon arrangement on
the desktop.
This action arranges the icon alphabetically,
and vertically
7 Note the positions of the arranged icons by their names
from the desktop. Verify whether the icons are
arranged by name.
8 Repeat step 4 to 7 by selecting the other options listed
under (such as size, Type and Modified).
9 Drag and place the icons as shown in Fig 11.
10 Repeat step 4 to pop, up display context menu. Choose
Arrange Icons by ‘Auto Arrange. Observe and record
the rearranged icons.
Once Auto Arrange is selected a check mark is
placed in front of Auto arrange as shown
This selection can only be removed if Auto
Arrange option is chosen once again. This
makes the check mark disappears in front of
Auto Arrange. DONO deselect the check mark 12 Repeat step 10 to deselect Auto Arrange option from
now. the Arrange Icons menu.
11 Drag the icons to different positions on the desktop 13 Repeat step 11.
and record the result and icon arrangement. 14 Arrange icons on the desktop as shown in Fig 11,and
get it checked by you instructor.
TASK 5: Resize, Move and Arrange windows

1 Open WordPad application by selecting as below, 6 Hold the left mouse button down and drag the window
Start All Programs Accessories WordPad side wards such that the WordPad application window
comes at the right side of the screen.
On opening an application, generally, it
occupies full screen, if not, maximize using 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to drag the WordPad application
maximize button window back to the left side of the screen (see
Fig 13).
2 Restore the application window size by clicking on
Restore button Fig 13
This makes the window size less than the full
screen size.
3 Move the mouse pointer over the right side border of
the window where the cursor shape changes from to
4 Hold the left mouse button down and drag the cursor
towards left with the changes cursor shape, till the
width of the window reduces to approximtely 1/3 of
the screen width. Release the mouse button.
5 Move the mouse pointer over the title bar of the window
as shown in Fig 12.
Fig 12
8 Practice to move the WordPad window to any other
Fig 15
places on the screen. After satisfactory practice, place
the WordPad window at the left edge of the screen.
9 Open Notepad application and repeat steps 2 to 7.
Finally place the reduced Notepad window by the side
of the WordPad window as shown in Fig 14.
Fig 14
Fig 16
10 Open microsoft Word Application. Repeat steps 2 to

7 and finally place it by the side of Notepad window.
Get it checked by instructor.
11 Move the pointer over the taskbar (at the bottom of the 13 Select the other two options in the popped up menu,
screen) and right click where no buttons/icons are shown below one after one check the arrangement of
placed. windows for each selected option.
This pops up menu list as shown in Fig 15.
12 Select Cascade Windows option from the popped up
menu to arrange all opened windows as shown in
Fig 16.
TASK 6: Create shortcut icon on the desktop

1 Click Start button and move the mouse pointer as
follows and right click on it. Fig 17
All Programs Accessories Calculator

A popped up menu appears as shown in the
Fig 17 when mouse pointer is right clicked.
2 Move the mouse pointer over the option in the displayed
menu.
A cascading menu will be displayed as shown in the
Fig 18.
3 Click on the Desktop (create shortcut) option in the
menu.
A shortcut for Calculator application will be
created on the desktop as shown in the Fig 19.
Fig 18 Fig 19
Customize desktop settings and user accounts

• open desktop settings
• modify desktop settings
• create new user
• grant and modify the user rights.
Requirements
• PC with MS-Office - 1 No. /trainee
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Open desktop settings from control panel

1 Click on Start menu.
Fig 2
2 Select Settings tab. (Fig 1)
Fig 1
3 This will open Settings Window (Fig 2).
TASK 2: Modify the desktop settings

1 Open the Settings Window (Fig 2)
Fig 3
2 Click on System in the Settings Window
3 Click Display to change the display settings (Fig 3)
4 Change the brightness of the display by dragging the
bar of Change brightness from left or right.
5 Record the brightness percentage at the left most and
right most end of the Change brightness bar.
6 Change the orientation and note the how the display
changes.
Note: To go back to the initial orientation, press
Revert
197
7 To change the background, click on the Personaliza- 10 Select Fill in Choose a fit. (Fig 6)
tion icon of settings window. ( Fig 2)
Fig 6
8 Click on the Background tab in the Personalization
window. (Fig 4)
Fig 4
11 To change the date,time and language click on the

Time & Languageicon of settings window. (Fig 2)
12 Click on Date & time tab. If you want to change the
time zone , Select from Time zone menu (Fig 7).
9 Select the Type of Background you want to keep. If it
is Picture, choose from picture given or You can Fig 7
browse your desired picture. (Fig 5)
Fig 5
13 To change the date and time, Set time automatically

toOff. Click change. (Fig 8)
Fig 8
Close the Window.
Fig 10
14 Type in the date and time. Click Change. (Fig 9)
Fig 9
15 The format of date and time can be changed by Close Window

clicking on the Change date and time formats as
shown in Fig 10.
TASK 3: Create new user

1 Open the Settings Window. (Fig 2)
Fig 13
2 Click on Accounts in the Settings Window.
3 Select E-mail & app accounts in Fig 11.
4 Click on Add an account to create a new user.
(Fig 11)
Fig 11
7 Enter the password in the Password field.

8 To create a new user account for family or other people
in the system, click on Family & other people tab in
Fig 14.
Fig 14
5 Select your account in Choose an account drop down
menu. Click Close. (Fig 12)
Fig 12
9 Click on the + Add someone else to this PC to add a

new user.9 Sign-in with a valid e-mail account.
10 Sign-in with a valid e-mail account.
6 Type the e-mail or phone in the Sign-in Window and 11 Click NEXT and confirm the password.
click NEXT. (Fig 13)
12 Close Window.
TASK 4: Granting and modify the user rights
1 Open the Settings Window (Fig 2) 6 Click on the Delete account and data tab to remove
2 Click on Accounts in the Settings Window. the selected user account from the system. (Fig 17)
3 Select Family & other people in Fig 14 Fig 17
4 Click on the user account whose user rights have to

be granted or modified. (Fig 15)
Fig 15
7 Change the user rights, click on the user account

and click on Change account type. (Fig 18)
Fig 18
5 If you want to delete the account of the user, Click

the user account and select Remove. (Fig. 16)
Fig 16
8 Select Administrator to give the user account rights

to do major changes in the system .
9 Select Standard User to give the user account to do
perform common daily tasks.
10 Click OK Close the Window.
System properties and control panel

• identify the desktop components in device manager
• change clock, date, regional language in control panel
• repair, modify and uninstall the applications in control panel.
Requirements
• PC with MS-Office - 1 No. /trainee
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identify the desktop components in device manager

1 Click on File manager in the taskbar. 6 Double click on the Universal Serial Bus controllers
2. Select and Right click this PC. in the menu in Fig 3.
3 Right Click on Properties. (Fig 1) Fig 3
Fig 1
4 Click on Device Manager in Fig 2.
Fig 2
7 Right click on USB Root Hub and select Disable device

(Fig 4).
Fig 4
201
8 Click Yes in the USB Root Hub. (Fig 5) 13 Insert a Pen drive/ USB in the USB slot
Fig 5 14 Check This PC folder to see if any removable device/
USB is shown. (Fig 7)
Fig 7
9 Insert a Pendrive/ USB in the USB slot.

10 Check This PC folder to see if any removable device/
USB is shown.
11 Go to Device Manager and double click on the
Universal Serial Bus controllers.
12 Right click on USB Root Hub and select Enable device
(Fig 6).
Fig 6
TASK 2: Change clock, date, regional language in control panel

1 Type Control Panel in the Search box 3 Select Date and Time from the Control panel. (Fig 9)
2 Select Control Panel app from the menu. (Fig 8)
Fig 9
Fig 8
4 Click on Change date and time (Fig 10).

5 Change the date and time. Press OK. (Fig 11)
6 Close window
Fig 10 Fig 13
Fig 11 Fig 14
7 To change language, select Region from the Control

panel (Fig 9)
8 Click on Language preferences as shown in Fig 12.
Fig 12 12 Click Install.
13 Close the Window.
9 Click on + Add a Language(Fig 13)

10 Type the name of the language you need the system
to work/change .(Fig 14)
TASK 3: Repair, modify and uninstall the applications in control panel
1 Select Programs and Features from the Control panel 2 Select the program from the drop down menu.
(Fig 9). (Fig 15).
Fig 5
3 Click on Uninstall / Change / Repair (Fig 16).
Fig 16
4 Click Yes to Uninstall / Change / Repair the 5 Close the window.

application.
Installing system application software

• Install MS-Office 2010
• Instal Nero software in windows operating system
• Instal VLC Media player
• Instal Adobe PDF Reader
• Download and Install Avira Free Antivirus software in windows operating system.
Requirements
• PC with MS-Office - 1 No.
• MS-windows 10 Software - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Installing Ms-Office 2010

Hardware and Software Requirements Fig 1
Microsoft Office 2010 is available in both 32

and 64-bit versions and will install on the
following minimum hardware requirements.
• 500 MHz or faster processor
• 256 MB or more RAM memory
• 3 GB or larger available hard disk space
• 1024x578 display resolution
• Windows XP SP3 32-bit, Windows Vista
SP1 32/64-bit, Windows Server 2003 R2 32/
64-bit with MSXML 6.0, Windows Server 2008
32/64-bit or later, Windows 7 32/64-bit,
Windows 8 32/64-bit, Windows Terminal
Server and Windows on Windows applications Fig 2
are supported as well.
When inserting the CD a prompt should show

windows explorer
1 Confirm whether PC meets the Office 2010 system
requirements.
2 Check to see if your PC is preloaded with Office
2010.
3 Click Run SETUP.EXE as shown in Fig 1.
4 Read the Microsoft Software License terms, place a
check mark in the box to indicate that agree with
them and press the Continue button as shown in
Fig 3.
205
5 Enter the 25 character product key on the MSU CD Fig 5
case and then click Continue as shown in Fig 2.
Fig 3
7 Click Close when the installation completes as shown

in Fig 6.
Fig 6
6 Press the Install Now button to begin the installation
as shown in Fig 4.
Fig 4
The Fig-5 shows the progress bar will indicate

how far along the installation has progressed.
Depending upon the speed of the computer,
this step could take several minutes on older
systems.
TASK 2: Installing nero software in windows operating system
1 Double click the application file of Nero as shown in

Fig 7. Initial file extracting window will appear as on
Fig 8.
Fig 7
Fig 8
2 Click "Run Program" button as on Fig 9. Serial number look it printed on CD ROM
Fig 9 5 Select the setup type as "Custom" as on Fig 13.
Fig 13
Window files configuring process will appear

few seconds as on Fig 10
Fig 10
6 Select "English" and click "Next" in the language

selection window as on Fig 14.
Fig 14
3 Click "Next" in the installation wizard as on Fig 11.
Fig 11
7 Click "Next" in the custom setup window as show in

Fig 15.
Fig 15
4 Type the user name , organization and serial number

as on Fig 12.
Fig 12
8 Click "Install" in the installation wizard as shown in 9 Click "Finish" button in the installation wizard as on
Fig 16. Fig 18.
Fig 16 Fig 18
The installation process wizard will appear as

on Fig 17
Fig 17 10 Get it check with your instructor.
TASK 3: Installing VLC media player

1 Double click on the Vlc-3.0.2-win32 exe file as on 4 Click Next Button as shown in Fig 21.
Fig 19.
Fig 21
Fig 19
2 Click Run button in the window.

3 Select the language and click ok button as shown in
Fig 20. 5 Click the Next Button On the License Agreement
window as on Fig 22.
Fig 20
Fig 22 The installation process window will display
as on Fig 25.
Fig 25
6 Select components of Media player and click Next

Button as shown in Fig 23.
Fig 23
8 Click Finish Button as on Fig 26.
Fig 26
7 Click Install Button as on Fig 24.

Fig 24
TASK 4: download and install the adobe Acrobat Reader DC from the Internet
1 Open the browser 2 Select the corresponding website https://
get.adobe.com/reader/otherversions/ as shown in
Fig 27.
Fig 27 Fig 31
3 Slect "windows version, Language and Reader

version"
4 Click download button as shown in Fig 28.
The down loading process window is shown in
The down loading process will start and the
Fig 32.
EXE file will show bottom of the Browser
Fig 32
Fig 28
8 After complete the installation click Finish Button as

shown in Fig 33.
Fig 33
5 Click the up arrow and again click show in folder

menu as shown in Fig 29.
Fig 29
The welcome window is shown in Fig 34.
Fig 34
6 Double click the file as shown in Fig 30.
Fig 30
7 Click Run button as shown in Fig 31.
TASK 5: Installing Avira Free Antivirus software in windows operating system
1 Click "Google Chrome" icon in windows task Bar as 5 After download the file "click the ^ button" and click
shown in Fig 35. "open" menu as shown in Fig 38.
Fig 35
Fig 38
2 Type the text "download avira antivirus for windows

10" in text box and click "Search" Button as shown in
6 Click "Run" button in the below window as Shown in
Fig 36.
Fig 39.
Fig 36
Fig 39
Display the list of related links in the chrome The bellowed screen shows "This will down
web page. load and install the software on your
3 Right click on the related link and click "Open link in computer"
new tab" as shown in Fig-36. 7 Click "Next" to continue the downloading process as
The corresponding software exe file will on Fig 40.
download bottom of the web page Fig 40
4 Click "START NOW" button in the web site as shown
in Fig 37.
Fig 37
The downloading progress bar will display the

downloading status as shown in Fig 41.
Fig 41 After complete the "preparing installation"
process the " Choose Installation Type"
window will appear
11 Select the "Express(Recommended)" setup type option
and select the license agreement and privacy policy
option in the bottom of the window as shown in
Fig 45.
Fig 45
8 Click "Finish" button after complete the 100%

downloading progress as on Fig 42.
Fig 42
12 Click "Next" button

The Avira Antivirus application installation
completed as shown in Fig 46 and 47
13 Get it checked with your instructor.
9 After complete the downloading process the window Fig 46

will appear as on Fig 43.
Fig 43
Fig 47
10 Click "install now" button in the bottom of the window.

The "preparing installation" process begins as
on Fig 44.
Fig 44
Familiar with multimedia system of CD ROM, DVD ROM & sound CARDS, install
and replace RAM in mother board
• install and replace a RAM in mother board
• familier with multimedia system - CD ROM & DVD ROM
• familier with multimedia system - Sound cards.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Microphone - 1 No.

• Antistatic wrist strap - 1 No. • Sound card different types 5.1,7.1 etc. - 1 No.
• Windows PC - 1 No. • Sound card driver CD - 1 No.
• Multimedia speaker 5.1 & 7.1 • Internet connection - as reqd.
etc/ Head phone - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Install and replace a RAM in mother board

1 Shut down and turn off the computer. Fig 2
If a PSU is used as grounded metal source, keep
it plugged in. If a separate ground is available,
unplug the computer completely. After turning
off the power supply, wait at least 10 seconds
before opening case to allow the motherboard’s
capacitors to discharge.
2 Open up your case as shown in Fig 1. While freshly installing RAM in your computer,
you should have at least one or two empty
Fig 1
slots. While choosing the RAM socket, refer
mother board manual. Some motherboards
may require to fill the sockets in a particular
order.
4 Open RAM retaining clips by gently pressing retaining
clips outward as shown in Fig 3.
Fig 3
This process varies from cabinet to cabinet,

usually involving the removal of a couple of
screws and a side panel. While servicing
computers be mindful of static electricity. To 5 Remove the RAM module as shown in Fig 4.
avoid building up a static charge that could
potentially short out a component, Use an anti- 6 Check the type and size of RAM.
static strap to ground yourself. 7 Blow off any loose dust or debris from the RAM using
3 Locate the RAM sockets on the motherboard as shown hand blower.
in Fig 2.
213
Fig 4 11 Blow out the empty RAM bay with canned air and
cleaning brush.
12 After drying replace the ram sticks in their bays.
Note : Make sure you line up the notches
correctly.
Apply firm and even downward pressure to each side of
the module until it snaps into place.
8 Clean the RAM module contacts using a cotton swab
slightly moistened with isopropyl alcohol or use a soft 13 Remove the antistatic wrist strap replace the side
cloth that does not leave fibers behind, such as lens panel, plug the power cable back in and power on the
cleaning cloth. computer.
Do not use eraser (Pencil eraser). Rubbing 14 Check the installed memory module size during startup,
eraser against epoxy laminate on RAM module by entering CMOS setup.
will produce static electricity and damage the 15 Check the installed memory module size by right
RAM chips. clicking my computer icon on windows desktop, select
9 Set the RAM module aside and allow it to dry completely. properties.
10 Repeat the steps 7, 8 and 9 for remaining RAM
modules.
TASK 2: Familiar with multimedia system CD ROMS, DVD ROMS

1 Find the CD or DVD drive you want to replace, Fig 8
probably in a top bay towards the front of the
computer. (Fig 6)
Fig 6
4 Slide the drive forward through the front of the

computer and remove it as shown in Fig 9.
2 Disconnect the power cable and IDE/SATA interface
cable from the back of the drive. Label the cable and Fig 9
connectors for a identification. (Fig 7)
Fig 7
Installing a CD/DVD drive

There might also be a small audio cable connected to
Use the following steps to install a new drive into the
the drive. Detach this cable from the back of the drive.
computer:
3 If the drive is attached to the case with screws, remove
1 If the drive bay is covered by a bay insert, remove
all screws on each side of the drive. Keep the screws
the bay insert using the following instructions:
safely for later use as shown in Fig 8.
a Slide the tip of a flat blade screw driver in between Replacing the covers
the side of the bay insert and the body of the
1 If the front cover was removed, connect any cables
computer.
to the front cover, and align the tabs on the front cover
b Using the screw driver, apply light pressure to one with the holes in the front of the computer. Snap the
side of the bay insert while pulling it out slightly. front cover into place as in Fig 13.
c Do the same thing on the other side, and remove Fig 13
the bay insert as in Fig 10.
Fig 10
2 Align the new drive in the bay opening and slide it in 2 Replace a side panel by matching the side panel tabs
until it is even with the front of the computer, aligning with the tab openings in the case as in Fig 14.
the screw holes in the drive with the holes in the
computer. If the drive attaches to the computer with a Fig 14
plastic latch, snap and lock it into place as in Fig 11.
Fig 11
3 Insert the side panel and slide it forward as in Fig 15.

3 If the drive is attached using screws, attach the drive Fig 15
to the drive bay using all the screws. CD and DVD
drives are susceptible to vibration so it is important to
seat all screws tightly against the metal drive bay as
in Fig 12.
Fig 12
4 Fasten the screws to secure the side panel. Repeat

for the other panel as in Fig 16.
Fig 16 Fig 17
TASK 3: Familiar with multimedia system & identify different components or sound cards
1 Open the computer case of side panel with a screw 3 Take the hard drive from where it rested in the tower.
driver or pushing a button to open the case in a Using both hands, carefully slide it outward. (Fig 19)
clamshell fashion. (Fig 17)
2 Locate the hard drive inside the computer case.
(Fig 18)
SI. No. Name of Components / Connector /
Burning a data in CD or DVD's using Nero

• Burn a data CD or DVD.
Requirements
• Nero software - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Burn a Data in CD or DVD

1 Put the CD in the CD/DVD writer Fig 2
2 Go to Start > All programs > Nero, then Nero
StartSmart.
3 Scroll over the icons on the top right of the program
window, to find the Data icon. See Fig 1.
Fig 1
Fig 3
4 Choose Make Data CD. This will launch Nero Express

as shown in Fig 2.
5 Click Add and browse the hard drive and select the
files like included on the CD. When finished adding
files click Finished.
6 Click Next and name the disk.
7 Check Verify data after burning if you want to make
sure your burn happened correctly (this will take a
little more time).
8 Click Burn and insert a blank CD as on Fig 3.
217
Identify different parts, its function and operation of CPU

• enter to dos command prompt
• use basic dos commands
• list directory contents using DIR command
• view directory structure.
Requirements
• PC with windows 10 OS - 1 No. /trainee
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Enter in to DOS command prompt

1 In Windows 10, one of the fastest ways to launch field from your taskbar, enter command or cmd
Command Prompt is to use search. Inside the search (Fig 1) Then, click or tap on the Command Prompt
result.
Fig 1
Search Box
2 Command prompt window is displayed on the screen. (Fig 2)
Fig 2
Dos Prompt
NOTE: Command Prompt is not case sensitive, meaning that commands can be typed with capital
letters, lowercase or any combination of them. The commands date or DATE will all work in the same
way.
218
TASK 2: Use basic DOS commands
Note: Each and every DOS command should Fig 6
be typed at Dos Prompt only and Enter key
should be pressed at the end of each DOS
command to execute it.
a Change the working drive from C to D
1 Type D: at DOS prompt as shown below.
7 Enter the TIME command to check the new date is
C:\Users\nimi> D: set. Record the displayed time.
Note: is the symbol for pressing Enter key on d Clears screen
the keyboard. When we enter wrong DOS
CLS command is used to clear the screen.
command, it displays Bad command or
filename or some other error messages (dis- D:\>CLS
cussed in Related Theory 1.5.01). We have to
The displayed contents are cleared and the DOS prompt
correct the Wrong DOS command to get the
appears at the top left corner of the screen.
result.
e Change the prompt
Now the prompt is changed from C:\Users\nimi> to D:\>
and the currently working drive is changed from C to D. PROMPT command is used to change the DOS prompt.
b View/change System date 8 Type the following PROMPT command to change the
DOS prompt from D:\>to copa>. Record the output.
DATE command is used to view/change system date.
D:\>PROPMPT copa$G
D:\>DATE
Note :$Grepresents>(greater than) sign.
2 It displays the current date as shown below (Fig 3)
9 Type the following PROMPT command to set the
Fig 3
current date as DOS prompt. Record the output.
D:\>PROPMPT $D$G
10 Type the following PROMPT command to change the
DOS prompt back to D:\>and Record the output.
3 If the current date is not displayed, type the Current
date as shown in the box given below. (Fig 4) D:\>PROPMPT $D$G
Fig 4 f Create, change, or delete a volume label on a

logical drive
LABEL command is used to Create, change, or delete a
volume label on a logical drive
11 Type the following command
D:\>LABEL
4 Enter the DATE command to check the new date is 12 It displays the existing label and also allows you to
set. Record the displayed the date. type new label as shown below. Record the output.
Record the displayed date. (Fig 7)
c View/change System time Fig 7
TIME command is used to view/change system time.
D:\>TIME
5 It displays the current time as shown below (Fig 5)
Fig 5
13 Retype the LABEL command and record the output.

g Display the volume label and volume serial number
on a logical drive
6 If the current time is not displayed, type the Current
D:\> VOL
time as shown in the box given below. (Fig 6)
15 It displays the volume label and volume serial number 19 Type the following command
of D drive as shown below. Record the output.(Fig 8)
D:\> SYSTEMINFO
Fig 8 20 It displays the complete system information as shown
below. (Fig 10)
Fig 10
h Print the name and version of the operating system

D:\> VER
17 It displays the name and version of the Operating
system as shown below. (Fig 9)
Fig 9
Record the output.

j Exit DOS session
18 Record the output. EXIT command is used to exit the DOS session.
i Display complete system information for Microsoft 21 Type the following command
Windows computers. D:\> EXIT
It exits the DOS session and return to Windows OS.
TASK 3: List directory contents using DIR command.

DIR command displays a list of files and directories in a
Fig 12
directory.
1 Change over to E drive by typing E: at DOS prompt.
2 Type the following command.
E:\> DIR
3 It displays a list of files and directories of E drive as
shown below. (Fig 11)
Fig 11

Note : /AD is a switch or option used with DIR
command to display only the directories of
specified drive or directory.
4 Type the following command E:\> DIR/AD
E:\> DIR htmlnimi 7 It displays only the directories of E drive as shown

below. Record the output. (Fig 13)
5 Displays a list of files and directories of HTMLNIMI
directory of E drive as shown below. Record the out-
put. (Fig 12)
Fig 13 Fig 14
E:\> DIR ?????

11 It lists all files and folders which are 5 characters
8 Type the following command. long without any extension as shown below.
E:\> DIR H*.* Note:Wildcards are typically either an asterisk

(*), which represents one or more characters
9 It lists all files and folders begin with letter H and have or question mark(?), which represents a single
any extension as shown below. (Fig 14) character.For more switches of DIR command
10 Type the following command. refer Related Theory 1.5.01 and practise them
with the help of instructor and record the
ouput.
TASK 4: View directory structure using TREE command

TREE command graphically displays the folder struc- Note : If the TREE command displays the
ture of a drive or path. directory structure more than a page, then use
1 Type the following command |more (pipe symbol | is available with \ key in
keyboard) command with TREE command
E:\> TREE (TREE | MORE) to view the directory structure
2 It displays the directory structure (only directories) page by page.
of aE drive as shown below. Record the output. 3 Type the following command
(Fig 15)
E:\> TREE/F htmlnimi
Fig 15 /F switch is used with TREE command to
display both the files and subdirectories of
HTMLNIMI directory as shown below. Record
the output.
Fig 16
Get all the recorded output checked by the instructor.
Familiar with different CPU operations

• manage files using DOS commands
• manage directories using DOS commands.
Requirements
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Manage files using DOS commands

Practice the following DOS commands in Command 3 COPY lesson1.txt ex1.txt
Prompt, record the output and get it checked by the
instructor: • It copies lesson1.txt to ex1.txt as shown in Fig 3.
Note :File name should not be greater than 11 Fig 3

characters out of which 8 characters are for the
name and 3 characters are for the extension.
1 COPYCON lesson1.txt
• It creates the text file lesson1.txt as shown in Fig 1
Fig 1
• Use DIR command to check that the file ex1.txt is in
the list.
4 REN ex1.txt notes.txt
• It renames the file ex1.txt as notes.txt as shown in
Fig.4
• Use DIR command to check that the file ex1.txt is
renamed as notes.txt (Fig 4)
Fig 4
• ^Z (Ctrl Z) or F6 is used to save the text file.
2 TYPE lesson1.txt
• It displays the content of the text file lesson1.txt as
shown in Fig 2.
Fig 2
5 DEL notes.txt
• It deletes the file notes.txt as shown in Fig 5.
222
Identify various computer peripherals and connect it to the system

• identify different controls on the processing unit cabinet
• identify various input/output devices connected to PC
• identify various ports available on PC for various devices.
Requirements
Hardware and software • Screw driver set and Allen key

• Identical PCs with labelled ports, (depending upon the type of
connection cables fixing used with connectors) - as reqd
(could even be dummy) - as reqd • Sticking labels - as reqd
• I/O devices such as Keyboard, Mouse
Monitor, Printer, Multimedia, Speaker,
CD Drive, DVD Drive and Microphone - as reqd
• One PC along with one set of I/O devices will be used for demonstrating by the instructor.
• Two PC’s each with one set of I/O devices will be used by two groups of trainees(each group not
exceeding a maximum of ten trainees)
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identify the major components, Controls and Ports seen on the processing unit cabinet
A The instructor has to demonstrate the uses of the While demonstrating, the following points should be
indicators, switches, controls and Ports external to the Highlighted and stressed.
processor unit found on the cabinet of the processor
unit as per the list given below. • Function of each switch
• Mains power-on switch • Function of each LED indicator
• Power on LED • Function of each visible device
• Reset button • Function of each port
• HDD busy LED • Basic specification of DVD and CD drive
• Floppy Disk Drive, Disk eject button, Disk busy LED • Basic symptoms of healthy processor (fan sound,
power light, any unusual noise/smell etc)
• CD Drive, CD busy/reading LED, controls and
sockets found on the disk drive • Precaution to be taken while using the computer
• Ports for connecting the Mouse and other devices • Precaution to be taken while operating DVD and CD
drives
• Printer port, keyboard connector, monitor connector
• Precaution to be taken while handling DVD and CD
• Speaker socket
• Precaution to be taken while handling and storing
• Universal serial bus port (USB) the processor unit.
TASK 2 : Identification of the I/O devices connected to PC
A The Instructor has to demonstrate the controls of • The Mouse

different I/O devices connected to PC as per the list
• The Keyboard
• The Monitor
• Multimedia speakers
• The Printer
223
• The microphone 1 Record the I/O devices connected to the computer
setup given to you
• The scanner
2 Record the manufacturer, type name and model name/
• The Modem
number of the I/O devices connected
• Any other I/O devices available at the time of
3 Record against each device whether it is an input
conducting this demonstration.
device or an output device
While carrying out the demonstration, the instructor has to
4 Get the recorded details of the devices checked by the
ensure the following points are highlighted,
instructor.
Precautions to be taken for handling the PC system.
Dismantle and assemble the desktop computer system

• dismantle and assemble desktop computer system
• connecting data cable and power cable to the various devices in the desktop.
Requirements
Hardware and software • Screw driver set and Allen key

• Identical PCs with labeled ports, (depending upon the type of
connection cables fixing used with connectors) - as reqd
(could even be dummy) - as reqd • Sticking labels - as reqd
• I/O devices such as Keyboard, Mouse
Monitor, Printer, Multimedia, Speaker,
CD Drive, DVD Drive and Microphone - as reqd
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Dismantling and assembling the computer system

1 Switch off and unplug the power cord from the PC. 8 Clean the objects with a soft cotton cloth, mild blower
2 Remove the component connections from the Cabinet etc. to remove dust and patches on them.
i.e. USB connections, Keyboard/Mouse Connections, Note : Don’t use any water based cleaner inside
LAN Connection, Parallel and Serial Port the system as it is power conductive and may
Connections short-circuit in case of moisture. Keep the parts
3 Ensure no power related connection is there with separated and clean.
Cabinet 9 Place the SMPS at right position and screw it.
4 Unscrew the cover that is opposite to the Mother board 10 Place properly the motherboard on the legs of cabinet.
section, as the motherboard section closure is fully In case any placement problem place the motherboard
closed by motherboard base, and remove the cover. first and screw it before fixing SMPS.
5 Remove the SMPS connections to Hard Disk drive, 11 Fix the processor and fan, RAM,PCI Cards which ever
DVD Drive, Motherboard Main Power, CPU Power, removed at proper places.
Fan Power Connector, PSU Connections, inside the
Cabinet. 12 Fix the Harddisk,DVD Drive,Floppy Drive,Other
components that to be screwed with the cabinet.
6 Remove the connectors from devices like SATA/IDE
Cables to HDD and DVD, Audio Connectors, Cabinet 13 Connect the connectors from motherboard to various
Front USB/Audio Connectors. devices like SATA,IDE,USB Extensions,etc.
7 Unscrew the motherboard screws, HDD-DVD screws 14 Plug the SMPS connections to Motherboard,CPU
and other removable items and dismantle. PSU,Devices,which are on power required
connections.
Warning: Do not remove or misplace any
jumpers placed across the motherboard, as it 15 Screw up the side cover to close the cabinet.
will result malfunctioning or dead - error 16 Connect the devices and external devices using
motherboard operation. connectors into motherboard.
Note: Now the pc totally dismantled.keep a note 17 Connect the power chord finally to the Cabinet.
of all the parts is being dismantled, which will Note: Ensure that all connections are proper
be easier to re-assemble the system. Now switch ON the power and switch-ON the
system.
TASK 2: Connect data cable and power cable to the various devices in the desktop.
The trainees will connect the system with I/O devices as shown in (Fig 1)
225
Fig 1 4 Connect the monitor Data cable connector to the VGA
connector on the rear side of PC as shown in (Fig 5).
1 Connect the system power cable to the appropriate

socket on the rear side of the PC as Shown in
(Fig 2).
5 Connect the power cable of the monitor either to the

lower socket on the PC itself or a separate wall socket
depending on the type of power connector the cable
is provided with.
6 Connect the speaker boxes/Headphone cable
2 Connect the Keyboard connector to the appropriate connector (RCA jack) to line out speaker jack (RCA
Keyboard socket on the rear side of the PC as shown female) on the rear end of the PC as shown in (Fig 6)
in (Fig 3).
3 Connect the Mouse connector to Com1, Com2 , PS/

2 or USB port ( according to type of connector the 7 Connect mics cable connector. RCA Jack to the MIC
Mouse comes with) as shown in (Fig 4). in RCA socket provided at the rear side of the PC
and record it as shown in (Fig 7).
8 Connect printer data cable DB 25 pin male connector
to the parallel port DB 25 pin female connector
provided on the rear side of PC as shown in (Fig 8).
Install driver for printer and print document using different documents
• connect a printer to the PC
• install the printer software
• print document using commands.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Printer cable - 1 No.
• Laser jet printer - 1 No. • Printer with Wireless capability - 1 No.
• Inkjet printer - 1 No. • PC - 1 No.
• Dot matrix printer - 1 No. • Router - 1 No.
• Printer Installation Disk - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Connecting the printer to the computer

1 Unpack and place the printer on a flat, clean surface. Fig 1
2 Locate the ports and sockets in the printer.
3 Identify the type of printer cable needed for
connecting the printer to the PC.
4 Make sure both the Printer and computer are turned
off. Connect the parallel or USB cable to the printer
and press the wire latches into place to secure the
cable connector if present.
5 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
6 Plug the power chord in to the AC inlet socket located
at the back of the printer and the other end to the
properly grounded electrical socket.
TASK 2: Printer software installation

1 Insert the printer installation software disk in the DVD 3 Select “Add a Local Printer”. (Fig 3)
drive.
Fig 3
2 Use the Add printer wizard from the control panel
(Fig 2).
Fig 2
228
4 Choose the printer port as shown in (Fig 4) and click Fig 7
on next.
Fig 4
5 Click on have disk as shown in (Fig 5). 8 Type the printer name. (Fig 8)
Fig 5 Fig 8
9 The printer gets installed. Share the Printer if needs

by selecting the sharing option. (Fig 9)
6 Browse and select the setup information file *.inf from
the installation disk and clikck on ok. (Fig 6) Fig 9
Fig 6
7 Select the printer from the printers displayed in the 10 Print a test page and complete the installation by
screen (Fig 7). clicking on “Print a Test Page”.
11 Click on finish to complete the installation.
12 If the test page does not print, then consult your
instructor.
TASK 3: Print the document using commands
1 Press office buttion. Fig 10
2 Select print.
3 Print window come as shown in Fig 10.
4 Select printer type page no 4 number of copies.
5 Press print.
Identification of different types of modems

• identify an different parts, its function and operation of modem
• install a modem to the computer to send and receive data over a telephone line or satellite connection.
PROCEDURE
Identifying the modems in device manager Idenitifying the modem physically in the computer
1 Go to “start” then click on “control panel”. case
2 Click on “System & Security” then. 1 Turn off the computer and takeoff the power cont.
3 Double click on “Administrative tools”. 2 Open the case by taking out a few screws on the
back of the case.
4 Double click on “Computer management”.
3 Locate the moden installed.
5 Click on “Device manager” and wait for some seconds
to get explore. 4 Remove the modem for inspection.
6 Check a list of devices installed in computer will 5 Pull the modem from the PCI slot, using firm but gentle
appear. force.
7 Search for the “modems” installed in your pc. Click 6 Look at the modems lable to identify it.
on sign (+) to explore modems installed in the PC. 7 Reinstall the modem by reversing the process-push it
8 Right click on specific moden, and select “Properties” firmly and squerly back in the PCI slot.
to bring up more information (Such as Driver version 8 Put the screw back in.
& Data etc.,)
9 Close the case and put the power cord back in.
231
Install a modem to computer to send and receive data over satellite a connection
• identify an different parts, its function and operation of modem
• install a modem to the computer to send and receive data over a telephone line or satellite connection.
Requirements
• Ethernet cable - 1 No.
• PIV based system or above - 1 No. • RJ-45 Pins (Male) - 1 No.
• Modems (different types) - 1 No. • Wifi enabled devices Like
• Phone cable with RJ-11 jacks - 1 No. (Lapops, Mobile phone etc.,) - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1 : Install a modem to the computer to send and receive data over a cable or a satellite connection
1 Unpack the modem and its accessories. It should have
8 Insert the installation diskette or CD (if you do not
the modem, cable, phone cord, power adapter,
receive prompts for installing the modem), click the
installation diskette or CD, and instruction manual.
drive, and click (or double-click) the installation
2 Turn off the computer and any attached devices program on the diskette or CD.
(Fig 1).
9 Run any test program that comes with the installation
software to ensure that the modem is working
Fig 1
correctly.
Installing an cable modem
1 Buy a cable modem or request one from the internet
service provider.
2 Once it was there (Fig 2).
Fig 2
3 Attach on end of the modem cable to the serial port

(wide, 25-pin connector) on the computer and the
other end to the modem.
4 Connect one end of the phone cord to the modem
port marked “wall” or “line” and the other end to the
wall jack of your phone line. If the modem will be
sharing the line with a telephone, connect the cord of
the telephone to the modem port marked “phone”.
5 Attach the power adapter plug to the modem and the
power transformer plug to the power outlet, if this is
required for your modem.
6 Turn on the computer and the modem, if it has an off
switch. 3 Connect the cable TV to the modem first.
7 When your computer starts up, follow the software 4 Plug the modem in to a standard wall outlet.
installation instructins if prompted by your computer
5 Shouldn’t be any confusion as to which end goes in
system (e.g., windows Plug ‘n play feature).
to the modern and which goes in to the TV outlet.
232
Construct and test DAC and ADC using computer network circuit
• construct and test DAS using computer network circuit.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • RS 232 or RS 485 connectors - 1 No
• A working PC - 1 No • Screw driver - 1 No
• DAS (Data acquisition system) - 1 No • Cable as required - as reqd.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Construct and test DAS using computers
1 Fill the empty boxes in the block diagram with the
help of instructor.
2 Check the DAS by connecting to the AC supply.
3 Connect RS.485 / RS.232 connector between PC and
DAS.
4 Connect sensor / Trans devier output to DAQ/DAS
(Fig 2).
5 Get the connections checked by the instructors.
DAS / DAQ - hardware interfaces the signal
and a PC
233
Instrument Mechanic - Microprocessor 8085
Identify various ICs and their function on the given microprocessor kit
• note down various ICs on the microcontroller trainer kit
• identify the function of ICs on the microcontroller trainer kit.
Requirements
Materials
• 8051 Microcontroller Trainer kit
• Aids: Layout diagram of ICs on the
with manual - 1 Set
8051 microcontroller kit - as reqd
• Digital Multimeter with probes - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
Note: 3 Note down the code number/marking on each IC,

number of pins and record the observations in
1. The Instrument has to prepare the layout
Table - 1
diagram of ICs in the 8051 microcontroller
trainer kit. 4 Get the work checked by the Instructor
2. Label the main ICs for the functions like 2 Open the top cover of the microcontroller trainer kit,
interfacing, RAM EPROM latch, buffer, and observe the ICs on the board with reference to
keyboard controller, peripheral control etc. the layout diagram.
according to the microcontroller trainer kit
available in the lab, to be provided along 3 Note down the code number/marking on each IC,
with the trainer kit for this exercise. number of pins and record the observations in
Table - 1
1 Collect the microcontroller trainer kit with its operating
instructions manual.
2 Open the top cover of the microcontroller trainer kit,
and observe the ICs on the board with reference to Fig 1
the layout diagram.
Table - 1
S. Function IC No. No.of Function/ Remarks

No. Pins Purpose
of IC
1 IC 1
2 IC2
3 IC3
4 IC4
5 IC5
234
Identify the address range of RAM & ROM of 8085 microprocessor

• identify address range of RAM of the 8085 microprocessor trainer kit
• identify address range of ROM of the 8085 microprocessor trainer kit.
Requirements
• 8051 microcontroller Trainer kit • Nil
with manual - 1 Set
PROCEDURE
The Instructor has to refer the Instruction 4 Calculate the memory capacity by subracting the
Manual of the 8085 microprocessor trainer kit starting address from the end address (using
and prepare the memory location of the RAM hexadecimal number) and record in Table - 1.
and ROM address range for the user programs 5 Get the work checked by the instructor
in the trainer kit available in the lab
Table - 1
1 Refer to the instruction manual of the microcontroller
trainer kit, read the RAM address which is used to Memory Starting End Memory
load user program Type Address Address Capacity
2 Refer to the instruction manual of the microcontroller
RAM
trainer kit,read the ROM address which is used to
load user program ROM
3 Record the address of RAM and ROM used in the
microcontroller trainer kit in the given tabular form
235
Measure the crystal frequency, connect it to the controller

• identify the crystal oscillator in the given microprocessor kit
• measure the clock frequency of the given microprocessor kit.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Oscilloscope (0-20 MHz) with

• 8085 Microprocessor Trainer kit manual and probes - 1 No.
with manual - 1 Set
Materials
• DMM with probes - 1 No.
• Digital frequency meter - 1 No. • Nil
PROCEDURE
1 Collect the microprocessor kit from the instructor. 6 Repeat step 5 at pin no. 2.
2 Identify the crystal oscillator in the microprocessor 7 Record the observed readings in the Table 1.
kit.
3 Refer to the operating manual note down the freq and
locate the pin number 1 and 2 of the microcontroller Table - 1
IC 8051 (refer Fig 1). Clock CRO waveform/ Remarks
Note: Use DMM and measure the clock frequency frequency
frquency by selecting the Hz range if available. as per
manual
4 Prepare the CRO for measurements with Ch-1 input.
Pin No. 1 Pin No. 2
5 Switch ON the microcontroller and measure the crystal
signal waveform at pin 1 with respect to ground and
calculate the frequency.
Fig 1
236
Identify the port pins of the microprocessor and configure the ports for input &
output operation
• identify the port pins in 8085 microcontroller
• enter the program in the microcontroller kit and execute it.
Requirements
• 8051 microprocessor Trainer kit • Program to operate the I/O port - as reqd.
with manual - 1 Set
• DMM with probes - 1 No.
• Logic probes - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Identification of port pins in 8051 microprocessor

1 Collect the 8085 microprocessor kit and identify the Table - 1
sections using instruction manual.
2 Identify the pin connection used for different ports on S. No. Port Number Pin Number Alternative
the microcontroller IC 8085.
3 Notedown the pin number of ports in Table - 1, and
mark the ports with dual function.
4 Note down the alternative pins of the ports in Table - 1
TASK 2: Entering the program into the microprocessor

1 Refer to the instruction manual and identify all the Program
operating controls and switches.
LOOP MOV A, P1
2 Connect the switch to port - 1
MOV DPTR, #FF13
3 Configure the port - 1 as input port
MOV X @ DPTR, A
4 Connect the output port to LEDs
SJMP LOOP
5 Enter the given program and execute it on the trainer
kit. Note: The instructor has to explain about the
given program and its working. The above
Note: In the given program LED port address program can be repeated for different Input/
(FF13) is designed and tested as per the
Output ports.
manufacturer of the microprocessor kit. It may
vary for kits of different manufacturer / models.
6. Operate the switches one by one and verify the output
by using LEDs
237
Use 8085 microprocessor, connect 8 LEDs to the port and blink the LEDs with
switch
• enter the program to blink 8 LEDs using switch and run it on the microprocessor trainer kit
• check the result through the port - 1 and record the observation.
Requirements
• 8085 Microprocessor trainer kit • 8 LEDs interface module
with instructional manual - 1 Set. (available on board) - 1 No.
• Trainees tool kit - 1 Set • Program to blink the 8 LEDs
• Digital multimeter with probes - 1 No. through switch - as reqd.
• Logic probe - 1 No.
PROCEDURE
Note:
Program
1. The instructor has to enter the program,
LOOP START JNB 90, START
execute and ensure that the 8051
microprocessor trainer kit is functioning MOV DPTR, #FF13
correctly before given to the trainees for MOV A, #FF
this exercise / task
MOV X, @DPTR, A
2. Make necessary modifications in steps /
program according to the microprocessor LCALL DELAY
trainer kit available in the section MOV A, #00
1 Collect the 8085 microprocessor trainer kit from the MOV X @DPTR, A
instructor
LCALL DELAY
2 Refer to the instruction manual and identify all the
operating controls / switches SJMP LOOP
3 Configure the port - 1 of 8085 microprocessor kit as DELAY LOOP
input port MOV RO, #FF
The onboard 8 LED interface module LOOP 2 MOV R1, #FF
connected internallly is used for this task.
LOOP 1 DJNZ R1, LOOP 1
4 Enter the given program to blink the 8 LEDs through
switch into the microprocessor trainer kit. DJNZ RO, LOOP 2
5 Execute the program and observe the blinking of LEDs. RET

238
Familiar with instruction set of 8085 micro processor data transfer group,
Arithmetic group and logic group
• Familiar with instruction set of 8085.
Requirements
• Microprocessor 8085 manual
PROCEDURE
TASK: Familiar with instruction set of 8085

1 Read and understand the instruction set of 8085. ACI Add Immediate data to Accumulator Using Carry
2 Read data transfer group, arithmetic group and logical SUB Subtract from Accumulator
group.
SUI Subtract Immediate Data from Accumulator
3 Get help from instructor.
SBB Subtract from Accumulator Using Borrow (Carry)
The 8085 Instruction set Flag
As we promised, in an earlier lesson, we are going to go SBI Subtract Immediate from Accumulator Using
through an in-depth explanations of all the 8085 Borrow (Carry)
instruction.
INR Increment Specified Byte by one
Data Transfer Croup:
DCR Decrement Specified Byte by one
The data transfer instructions move data between
registers or between memory and registers. INX Increment Register Pair by one
MOV Move DCX Decrement Register Pair by one
MVI Move Immediate DAD Double Register Add; Add content of Register
Pair to H & L Register Pair
LDA Load Accumulator Directly from Memory
STA Store Accumulator Directly in Memory
LHLD load H & L Registers Directly from Memory
SHLD Store H & L Registers Directly in Memory
An ‘X’ in the name of a data transfer instruction implies
that it deals with a register pair (16-bits);
LXI Load Register Pair with Immediate data
LDAX Load Accumulator from Address in Register Pair
STAX Store Accumulator in Address in Register Pair
XCHG Exchange H & L with D & E
XTHL Exchange Top of Stack with H & L
Arithmetic Group:
The arithmetic instructions add, subtract, increment, or
decrement data in registers or memeory.
ADD Add to Accumulator
ADI Add Immediate Data to Accumulator
ADG Add to Accumulator Using Carry Flag
239
Logical Group: The compare instructions compare the content of an 8-
bit value with the contents of the accumulator;
This group performs logical (Boolean) operations on data
in registers and memory and on condition flags. CMP Compare
The logical AND, OR, and Exclusive OR instructions CPI Compare Using Immediate Data
enable you to set specific bits in the accumulator ON or
The rotate instructions shift the contents of the
OFF.
accumulator one bit position to the left or right:
ANA Logical And with Accumulator
RLC Rotate Accumulator left
ANI Logical And with Accumulator Using Immediate
RRC Rotate Accumulator Right
Data
RAL Rotate left through carry
ORA Logical OR with Accumulator
RAR Rotate right through carry
OR Logical OR with Accumulator using Immediate
Data CMA Complement accumulator
XRA Exclusive Logical OR with Accumulator CMC Complement carry flag
XRI Exclusive OR Using Immediate Data STC Set carry flag
Perform addition and subtraction of two 8 bit numbers using 8085

microprocessor
• perform additional of two 8 bit numbers using 8085 micro processor
• perform subtraction of two 8 bit numbers using 8085 micro processor.
Requirements
• Screw driver - 1 No
• Micro processor 8085 - 1 No • Multimeter - 1 No
• Instruction manual - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: perform addition of two 8 bit numbers using 8085 micro processor
1 Test the micro processor to confirm the good working 3 Check the result.
condition.
2 Enter the following addition of two 8 bits program with
the help of instructor.
FLOW CHART
PROGRAM
LDA 4150 ; (4150) = (A) = 23
MOV B,A ; (A) = (B)
LDA 4151 ; (4150) = (A) = 35
ADD B ; (A) + (B) = (A)
STA 4152 ; (A) = (4152) = 58
HLT
241
Object codes
Memory address Opcodes Mnemonics

4100 3A LDA 4150
4101 50
4102 41
4103 47 MOV B, A
4104 3A LDA 4152
4105 51
4106 41
4107 80 STA 4152
4108 32
4109 52
410A 41
410B 76 HLT
1 Key in the opcodes from the address specified. 3 Execute the program and check for the result at 4152.
2 Enter data at 4150 and 4151 as specified in the 4 Change data at 4150 and 4151 and execute each
example. time and check for result.
TASK 2: perform addition of two 8 bit numbers using 8085 micro processor
1 Test the micro processor to confirm the good working 3 Check the result.
condition.
PROGRAM
2 Enter the following addition of two 8 bits program with
the help of instructor. LXI H, 4150 ; Initialise memory pointer to 4150
MOV A, M ; (4150) = (A) = 49
FLOW CHART
INX H ; Point to next data.
SUB M ; (4151) = (A)
INX H ; Point to next location
MOV M,A ; (A) = (4152)
HLT
Object codes

4100 21 LXI H,4150
4101 50
4102 41
4103 7E MOV A, M
4104 23 INX H
4105 96 SUB M
4106 23 INX H
4107 77 MOV M,A
4108 76 HLT
1 Key in the opcodes from the address specified. 3 Execute the program and check for result at 4152.
2 Enter data that is needed for execution at 4150 and 4 Try changing data and check for results each time.
4151.
Demonstrate entering of simple program, execute and monitor the result

• Write a program to control stepper motor using micro processor (8085) kit.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Stepper motor module / trainer - 1 No

• Micro processor 8085 kit - 1 No • Screw driver - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK: Write a program to control stepper motor using micro processor (8085)
1 Test the micro processor kit for its good condition. 3 Connect stepper motor module with micro processor
via patch card.
2 Enter the following program in micro processor and
execute it. 4 Observe the control of motor speed.
Power Supply Micro Processor Stepper Motor Module Stepper Motor
Program
4100 21 1A 41 START LXI H, LOOK UP

4103 06 04 MVI B,04
4105 7E REPT: MOV A,M
4106 D3 CO OUT OCHO
4108 11 03 03 LXI D,0303H
410B 00 DELAY: NOP
410C 1B DCX D
410D 7B MOV A, E
410E B2 ORA D
410F C2 0B 41 JNZ DELAY
4112 23 INX H
4113 05 DCR B
4114 C2 05 41 JNZ REPT
4117 C3 00 41 JMP START
411A 09 05 06 OA lOOK UP: DB 09 05 06 0A
244
Write a programme in assembly language load accumulator with 8 bit data and
transfer the data accumulator to B register
• Enter the program in 8085 micro processor kit & execute it.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • 8085 Micro processor with manual - 1 No
• Trainees tool kit - 1 set • Logic probe - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK: Entering the program in 8085 micro processor & execute it

1 Collect 8085 microprocessor kit from instructor. 3 Enter the simple assembly language program to
2 Refer to the instruction manual and identify all the operate two 8 bit addition into the processor.
operating controls and switches. 4 Execute the given program and verify the result.
Sample problem
(4000H) = 14H
(4001H) – 89H
Result = 14H + 89H = 9DH
Program
LXI H 4000 H : HL points 4000H
Mov A,M : get first operand
INX H : HL points 4001 H
ADD M : Add second operand
INX H : HL points 4002 H
MoV B, A : Store result at B register
HLT : Terminate the execution
245
Write a programme in assembly language data to load two 8 bit data into two
memory location add them result be store in another memory location
• write a program to load two 8 bit data into two memory location add them and store the result in another
memory location.
Requirements
Tools/Equipments/Instruments • Manual - 1 No
• 8085 Micro processor - 1 set • Screw driver - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK: Write a program to load two 8 bit data into two memory location add them and store the result in
another memory location
1 Check the micro processor kit for its good condition. 4 Execute the program and check for results.
2 Enter the opcodes from the address specified. 5 Try changing data and check for result each time
3 Enter the data for execution. you execute.
FLOW CHART FOR MULTI PRECISION ADDITION
START
INTIALISE COUNT POINTER 1, POINTER 2, CARRY=0
(POINTER 1)= (POINTER 1)+ (POINTER 2)+ CARRY
POINTER 1= POINTER 1+1 POINTER 2= POINTER 2+1 COUNT=COUNT-1
IS COUNT=0?
STOP
PROGRAM
XRA A ; Accumulator = 0; CF = 0
LXI H, 4150 ; Initialise start address of data
MOV B,M ; Get count to B; B=03
LXI D, 4160 ; Start address of second data
INX H ; Point to first data
LOOP: LDAX D ; Get 8-bits of second number
ADC M ; Add with corresponding 8-bits of first number with carry
MOV M,A ; Store corresponding result
INX H ; Point to subsequent data
INX D
DCR B ; Check length
JNZ LOOP ; If not equal to zero repeat
HLT
246
Object codes

4100 AF XRA A
4101 21 LXI H, 4150
4102 50
4103 41
4104 46 MOV B,M
4105 11 LXI D, 4160
4106 60
4107 41
4108 23 INX H
4109 1A LOOP: LDAX D
410A 8E ADC M
410B 77 MOV M,A
410C 23 INX H
410D 13 INX D
410E 05 DCR B
410F C2 JNZ LOOP
4110 09
4111 41
4112 76 HLT
Identify the port pins of the processor and 8255 configure the ports for input
and output operations
• identify the port pins of micro processor 8085
• Identify the port pins of programmable pheripheral interface 8255.
Requirements
• Screw driver - 1 No
• Microprocessor - 1 No
PROCEDURE
TASK 1: Write a program to load two 8 bit data into two memory location add them and store the result in
another memory location
1 Write the pin number in fig 1.
Pin No. Pin name Pin Direction
2 Identify the pin detail & direction. or or
3 Fill in the table 1.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Table 1
22
Pin name Pin Direction 23

Pin No.
or or 24
1 25
2 26
3 27
4 28
5 29
6 30
7 31
32
248
or or
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
TASK 2: Identify the port pins of 8255

1 Write the pin number in fig 2.
2 Identify the pin detail and direction. or or
3 Fill in table 2. 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Table 2 26
27
28
or or
29
1
30
2 31
3 32
4 33
5 34
6 35
7 36
8 37
38
9
39
10
40

Instrument Mechanic Vol II of II TP

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instrument Mechanic Vol II of II TP

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instrument Mechanic Vol II of II TP

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INSTRUMENT MECHANIC

SECTOR: ELECTRONICS & HARDWARE

DIRECTORATE GENERAL OF TRAINING

Developed & Published by

National Instructional Media Institute

Copyright © 2021 National Instructional Media Institute, Chennai

Director General/ Addl. Secretary

New Delhi - 110 001

MEDIA DEVELOPMENT COMMITTEE MEMBERS

Smt. Chitra _ Training officer,

Smt. Gomathi _ Training officer,

Shri. Thirugnanam _ Training officer (Retd),

Shri.Nirmalya nath - Deputy General Manager,

Shri. S. Gopala krishnan - Assistant Manager,

The manual is divided into Sixteen modules.

Module 1 Semi conductor, Transistors and power supply circuit 150

Module 1 : Semi conductor, Transistors and power supply

2.1.179 Identify the components/devices of SMPS and draw their

Module 5 : A/D and D/A converters

Module 6 : Digital meters & CRO

2.8.277 Demonstrate entering of simple program, execute and monitor the

LEARNING / ASSESSABLE OUTCOME

On completion of this book you shall be able to

1 Identify, Test various analog and power electronics components, Construct,

Duration Reference Learning Professional Skills Professional Knowledge

Label Code No.of Forward Reverse Ratio of Servicable/

Tools/Equipment/Instrument • Volte meter

TASK 1: Construction and measurement VI characteristics of PN junction diode

Collect all the required components, test and assemble

Fig 3 Precautions : Connections must be tight

Forward voltage drop across Forward current Forward Diode

TASK 1: Find forward characteristics of zener diode

TASK 2: Find Reverse characteristics of zener diode

6 Electronics & Hardware: Instrument Mechanic (NSQF Level - 5) - Exercise 2.1.149

6 Get the work checked by the Instructor.

8 Electronics & Hardware: Instrument Mechanic (NSQF Level - 5) - Exercise 2.1.150

Electronics & Hardware: Instrument Mechanic (NSQF Level - 5) - Exercise 2.1.150 9

2 In this circuit, the voltage across resistor

TASK 3 : Construction and testing of voltage divider biased transistor CE amplifier

7 Get the work checked by the Instructor.

TASK 1 : Construction and testing of the effect of bypass capacitor in CE amplifier

TASK 2 : Plotting the frequency response of CE amplifier

14 Electronics & Hardware: Instrument Mechanic (NSQF Level - 5) - Exercise 2.1.152

Graph 1 12 Get the work checked by the Instructor.

Electronics & Hardware: Instrument Mechanic (NSQF Level - 5) - Exercise 2.1.152 15

Construct and test a Common Base amplifier

2 Get the assembled circuit checked by the Instructor.

Graph of Input/output phase relationship

TASK 2 : Comparison of phase relationship between input and output

Electronics & Hardware: Instrument Mechanic (NSQF Level - 5) - Exercise 2.1.153 17

TASK 1: Current gain Ai of CE amplifier

TASK 2: Voltage gain Av of the amplifier

TASK 3: Calculating power gain Ap of the amplifier

Electronics & Hardware: Instrument Mechanic (NSQF Level - 5) - Exercise 2.1.154 19

Identify different power electronic components, specification and terminals

5 Get the work checked by the Instructor.

TASK 2 : Identifications of UJT by its code number

Electronics & Hardware: Instrument Mechanic (NSQF Level - 5) - Exercise 2.1.155 21

Construct and test a FET Amplifier

One of the given JFET should be a BF 245B or BFW 10 or equivalent.